Lexmark Printer 16M1260 User Manual
X651de, X652de, X654de,  
X656de, X656dte, X658d,  
X658de, X658dme, X658dfe,  
X658dte, X658dtme, X658dtfe  
User's Guide  
July 2008  
www.lexmark.com  
Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
© 2008 Lexmark International, Inc.  
All rights reserved.  
740 West New Circle Road  
Lexington, Kentucky 40550  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Safety information...........................................................................13  
Learning about the printer.............................................................15  
Finding information about the printer........................................................................................................................15  
Printer configurations........................................................................................................................................................16  
Selecting a location for the printer...............................................................................................................................17  
Basic functions of the scanner........................................................................................................................................17  
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass................................................................................................................18  
Understanding the printer control panel...................................................................................................................19  
Understanding the home screen...................................................................................................................................20  
Using the touch-screen buttons....................................................................................................................................22  
Additional printer setup..................................................................26  
Installing internal options................................................................................................................................................26  
Available internal options............................................................................................................................................................ 26  
Accessing the system board to install internal options.................................................................................................... 27  
Installing a memory card ............................................................................................................................................................. 29  
Installing a flash memory or firmware card........................................................................................................................... 30  
Installing an Internal Solutions Port......................................................................................................................................... 32  
Installing a printer hard disk ....................................................................................................................................................... 38  
Installing a fax card ........................................................................................................................................................................ 42  
Attaching cables..................................................................................................................................................................44  
Verifying printer setup.......................................................................................................................................................45  
Printing a menu settings page................................................................................................................................................... 45  
Printing a network setup page .................................................................................................................................................. 46  
Setting up the printer software......................................................................................................................................46  
Installing printer software ........................................................................................................................................................... 46  
Updating available options in the printer driver................................................................................................................. 47  
Setting up wireless printing.............................................................................................................................................48  
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network...................................................................... 48  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)................................................................................................... 49  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)................................................................................................. 50  
Installing the printer on a wired network...................................................................................................................53  
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port...........................................56  
Setting up serial printing..................................................................................................................................................58  
Setting up the printer to fax............................................................................................................................................60  
Choosing a fax connection.......................................................................................................................................................... 60  
Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using an RJ11 adapter .................................................................................................................................................................. 61  
Connecting directly to a telephone wall jack in Germany............................................................................................... 64  
Connecting to a telephone ......................................................................................................................................................... 65  
Connecting to an answering machine.................................................................................................................................... 66  
Connecting to a computer with a modem............................................................................................................................ 68  
Setting the outgoing fax name and number........................................................................................................................ 69  
Setting the date and time............................................................................................................................................................ 70  
Turning Daylight Saving Time on ............................................................................................................................................. 70  
Loading paper and specialty media.............................................71  
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type........................................................................................................................71  
Configuring Universal paper settings..........................................................................................................................71  
Loading the standard or optional 250-sheet or 550-sheet tray..........................................................................72  
Loading the 2000-sheet tray...........................................................................................................................................75  
Loading the multipurpose feeder.................................................................................................................................79  
Loading the envelope feeder..........................................................................................................................................81  
Linking and unlinking trays.............................................................................................................................................83  
Linking trays...................................................................................................................................................................................... 83  
Unlinking trays................................................................................................................................................................................. 83  
Assigning a custom paper type name..................................................................................................................................... 84  
Changing a Custom Type <x> name....................................................................................................................................... 84  
Paper and specialty media guidelines.........................................85  
Paper guidelines..................................................................................................................................................................85  
Paper characteristics...................................................................................................................................................................... 85  
Unacceptable paper ...................................................................................................................................................................... 86  
Selecting paper................................................................................................................................................................................ 86  
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead........................................................................................................................... 86  
Using recycled paper and other office papers..................................................................................................................... 87  
Storing paper.................................................................................................................................................................................... 87  
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...............................................................................................................88  
Paper sizes supported by the printer ...................................................................................................................................... 88  
Paper types and weights supported by the printer........................................................................................................... 90  
Paper types and weights supported by the finisher.......................................................................................................... 90  
Copying...............................................................................................92  
Making copies.......................................................................................................................................................................92  
Making a quick copy...................................................................................................................................................................... 92  
Copying using the ADF................................................................................................................................................................. 92  
Copying using the scanner glass .............................................................................................................................................. 93  
Copying photos....................................................................................................................................................................93  
Copying on specialty media............................................................................................................................................93  
Contents  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making transparencies.................................................................................................................................................................. 93  
Copying to letterhead................................................................................................................................................................... 94  
Customizing copy settings...............................................................................................................................................94  
Copying from one size to another............................................................................................................................................ 94  
Making copies using paper from a selected tray ................................................................................................................ 95  
Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes..................................................................................................... 95  
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)................................................................................................................ 96  
Reducing or enlarging copies .................................................................................................................................................... 96  
Adjusting copy quality.................................................................................................................................................................. 97  
Collating copies............................................................................................................................................................................... 97  
Placing separator sheets between copies ............................................................................................................................. 98  
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet........................................................................................................................ 98  
Creating a custom job (job build)............................................................................................................................................. 99  
Job interrupt.......................................................................................................................................................................100  
Placing information on copies.....................................................................................................................................100  
Placing the date and time at the top of each page..........................................................................................................100  
Placing an overlay message on each page..........................................................................................................................100  
Canceling a copy job........................................................................................................................................................101  
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF ...............................................................................................101  
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass .........................................................................101  
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed ..............................................................................................101  
Understanding the copy screens and options.......................................................................................................101  
Copy from........................................................................................................................................................................................101  
Copy to .............................................................................................................................................................................................101  
Scale...................................................................................................................................................................................................102  
Darkness...........................................................................................................................................................................................102  
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................102  
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................102  
Collate...............................................................................................................................................................................................102  
Options.............................................................................................................................................................................................102  
Improving copy quality...................................................................................................................................................104  
E-mailing..........................................................................................105  
Getting ready to e-mail...................................................................................................................................................105  
Setting up the e-mail function.................................................................................................................................................105  
Configuring the e-mail settings...............................................................................................................................................106  
Creating an e-mail shortcut...........................................................................................................................................106  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server ...................................................................................106  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen........................................................................................................106  
E-mailing a document.....................................................................................................................................................107  
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen..........................................................................................................................107  
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number ......................................................................................................................107  
Sending an e-mail using the address book.........................................................................................................................107  
Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Customizing e-mail settings.........................................................................................................................................108  
Adding e-mail subject and message information.............................................................................................................108  
Changing the output file type..................................................................................................................................................108  
Canceling an e-mail..........................................................................................................................................................109  
Understanding e-mail options.....................................................................................................................................109  
Original Size....................................................................................................................................................................................109  
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................109  
Orientation......................................................................................................................................................................................109  
Binding .............................................................................................................................................................................................109  
E-mail Subject ................................................................................................................................................................................109  
E-mail File Name............................................................................................................................................................................109  
E-mail Message..............................................................................................................................................................................110  
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................110  
Send As.............................................................................................................................................................................................110  
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................110  
Advanced Options........................................................................................................................................................................110  
Faxing...............................................................................................111  
Sending a fax......................................................................................................................................................................111  
Sending a fax using the printer control panel....................................................................................................................111  
Sending a fax using the computer .........................................................................................................................................112  
Creating shortcuts............................................................................................................................................................112  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................112  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen.........................................................................................113  
Using shortcuts and the address book......................................................................................................................113  
Using fax shortcuts.......................................................................................................................................................................113  
Using the address book..............................................................................................................................................................113  
Customizing fax settings................................................................................................................................................114  
Changing the fax resolution .....................................................................................................................................................114  
Making a fax lighter or darker ..................................................................................................................................................114  
Sending a fax at a scheduled time..........................................................................................................................................115  
Viewing a fax log...........................................................................................................................................................................115  
Blocking junk faxes.......................................................................................................................................................................115  
Canceling an outgoing fax.............................................................................................................................................116  
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning ................................................................................116  
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory.....................................................116  
Understanding fax options............................................................................................................................................116  
Original Size....................................................................................................................................................................................116  
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................116  
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................117  
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................117  
Darkness...........................................................................................................................................................................................117  
Advanced Options........................................................................................................................................................................117  
Contents  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Improving fax quality.......................................................................................................................................................118  
Holding and forwarding faxes......................................................................................................................................118  
Holding faxes..................................................................................................................................................................................118  
Forwarding a fax ...........................................................................................................................................................................119  
Scanning to an FTP address.........................................................120  
Scanning to an FTP address..........................................................................................................................................120  
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad ..................................................................................................................120  
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number....................................................................................................121  
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book ......................................................................................................121  
Creating shortcuts............................................................................................................................................................121  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server.........................................................................................121  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen.............................................................................................................122  
Understanding FTP options..........................................................................................................................................122  
Original Size....................................................................................................................................................................................122  
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................122  
Orientation......................................................................................................................................................................................122  
Binding .............................................................................................................................................................................................122  
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................122  
Send As.............................................................................................................................................................................................123  
Content.............................................................................................................................................................................................123  
Advanced Options........................................................................................................................................................................123  
Improving FTP quality.....................................................................................................................................................124  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive......................................125  
Scanning to a computer.................................................................................................................................................125  
Scanning to a flash drive................................................................................................................................................126  
Understanding scan profile options..........................................................................................................................126  
Quick Setup.....................................................................................................................................................................................126  
Format Type....................................................................................................................................................................................127  
Compression...................................................................................................................................................................................127  
Default Content.............................................................................................................................................................................127  
Color ..................................................................................................................................................................................................127  
Original Size....................................................................................................................................................................................127  
Orientation......................................................................................................................................................................................127  
Sides (Duplex) ................................................................................................................................................................................127  
Darkness...........................................................................................................................................................................................127  
Resolution........................................................................................................................................................................................128  
Advanced Imaging.......................................................................................................................................................................128  
Improving scan quality...................................................................................................................................................128  
Contents  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing.............................................................................................129  
Printing a document........................................................................................................................................................129  
Printing on specialty media...........................................................................................................................................129  
Tips on using letterhead.............................................................................................................................................................129  
Tips on using transparencies....................................................................................................................................................130  
Tips on using envelopes.............................................................................................................................................................130  
Tips on using labels......................................................................................................................................................................131  
Tips on using card stock.............................................................................................................................................................131  
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................................132  
Holding jobs in the printer........................................................................................................................................................132  
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows .............................................................................................133  
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh computer...................................................................133  
Printing from a flash drive..............................................................................................................................................134  
Printing information pages...........................................................................................................................................135  
Printing a directory list................................................................................................................................................................135  
Printing the print quality test pages......................................................................................................................................135  
Canceling a print job........................................................................................................................................................135  
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel ......................................................................................................135  
Canceling a print job from the computer............................................................................................................................136  
Clearing jams...................................................................................138  
Avoiding jams.....................................................................................................................................................................138  
Understanding jam numbers and locations...........................................................................................................139  
200 and 201 paper jams.................................................................................................................................................139  
202 paper jam.....................................................................................................................................................................141  
230–239 paper jams.........................................................................................................................................................142  
240–249 paper jams.........................................................................................................................................................143  
250 paper jam.....................................................................................................................................................................144  
260 paper jam.....................................................................................................................................................................145  
270–279 paper jams.........................................................................................................................................................145  
280–282 paper jams.........................................................................................................................................................145  
283 staple jams..................................................................................................................................................................146  
290–294 paper jams.........................................................................................................................................................148  
Understanding printer menus.....................................................150  
Menus list.............................................................................................................................................................................150  
Paper menu.........................................................................................................................................................................151  
Default Source menu...................................................................................................................................................................151  
Paper Size/Type menu ................................................................................................................................................................151  
Contents  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configure MP menu.....................................................................................................................................................................155  
Envelope Enhance........................................................................................................................................................................155  
Substitute Size menu...................................................................................................................................................................155  
Paper Texture menu ....................................................................................................................................................................156  
Paper Weight menu.....................................................................................................................................................................157  
Paper Loading menu ...................................................................................................................................................................159  
Custom Types menu....................................................................................................................................................................160  
Custom Names menu..................................................................................................................................................................161  
Custom Scan Sizes menu ...........................................................................................................................................................161  
Custom Bin Names menu ..........................................................................................................................................................162  
Universal Setup menu.................................................................................................................................................................162  
Bin Setup menu.............................................................................................................................................................................163  
Reports menu.....................................................................................................................................................................164  
Network/Ports menu.......................................................................................................................................................165  
Active NIC menu............................................................................................................................................................................165  
Standard Network or Network <x> menus .........................................................................................................................165  
SMTP Setup menu ........................................................................................................................................................................167  
Network Reports menu ..............................................................................................................................................................168  
Network Card menu.....................................................................................................................................................................168  
TCP/IP menu ...................................................................................................................................................................................169  
IPv6 menu........................................................................................................................................................................................170  
Wireless menu................................................................................................................................................................................171  
AppleTalk menu ............................................................................................................................................................................171  
NetWare menu...............................................................................................................................................................................172  
LexLink menu.................................................................................................................................................................................172  
Standard USB menu.....................................................................................................................................................................173  
Parallel <x> menu.........................................................................................................................................................................175  
Serial <x> menu ............................................................................................................................................................................177  
Security menu....................................................................................................................................................................180  
Miscellaneous menu....................................................................................................................................................................180  
Confidential Print menu.............................................................................................................................................................181  
Disk Wiping menu ........................................................................................................................................................................181  
Security Audit Log menu ...........................................................................................................................................................183  
Set Date/Time menu....................................................................................................................................................................183  
Settings menu....................................................................................................................................................................184  
General Settings menu ...............................................................................................................................................................184  
Copy Settings menu ....................................................................................................................................................................192  
Fax Settings menu........................................................................................................................................................................198  
E-mail Settings menu ..................................................................................................................................................................207  
FTP Settings menu........................................................................................................................................................................212  
Flash Drive menu ..........................................................................................................................................................................215  
Print Settings..................................................................................................................................................................................221  
Help menu...........................................................................................................................................................................233  
Contents  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer messages...............................................234  
List of status and error messages................................................................................................................................234  
Maintaining the printer.................................................................252  
Cleaning the exterior of the printer............................................................................................................................252  
Cleaning the scanner glass............................................................................................................................................252  
Adjusting scanner registration.....................................................................................................................................253  
Storing supplies.................................................................................................................................................................255  
Conserving supplies.........................................................................................................................................................255  
Checking the status of supplies...................................................................................................................................255  
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel..................................................................................255  
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer..........................................................................................255  
Ordering supplies..............................................................................................................................................................256  
Ordering print cartridges...........................................................................................................................................................256  
Ordering a maintenance kit......................................................................................................................................................257  
Ordering a fuser.............................................................................................................................................................................258  
Ordering an ADF maintenance kit..........................................................................................................................................258  
Ordering a transfer roller............................................................................................................................................................258  
Ordering charge rolls...................................................................................................................................................................258  
Ordering pick rollers ....................................................................................................................................................................258  
Ordering ADF replacement parts............................................................................................................................................259  
Ordering staple cartridges.........................................................................................................................................................259  
Recycling Lexmark products.........................................................................................................................................259  
Moving the printer............................................................................................................................................................259  
Before moving the printer.........................................................................................................................................................259  
Moving the printer to another location................................................................................................................................260  
Setting the printer up in a new location ..............................................................................................................................260  
Shipping the printer ....................................................................................................................................................................261  
Administrative support.................................................................262  
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.......................................................................262  
Using the Embedded Web Server...............................................................................................................................262  
Checking the device status............................................................................................................................................262  
Setting up e-mail alerts...................................................................................................................................................262  
Viewing reports..................................................................................................................................................................263  
Adjusting the brightness of the display....................................................................................................................263  
Adjusting Power Saver....................................................................................................................................................264  
Restoring the factory default settings.......................................................................................................................264  
Contents  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting.............................................................................266  
Solving basic printer problems....................................................................................................................................266  
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds...................................................................266  
Solving printing problems.............................................................................................................................................266  
Multiple-language PDFs do not print....................................................................................................................................266  
Error message about reading USB drive appears..............................................................................................................266  
Jobs do not print...........................................................................................................................................................................267  
Confidential and other held jobs do not print...................................................................................................................267  
Job takes longer than expected to print..............................................................................................................................268  
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper .................................................................................................268  
Incorrect characters print...........................................................................................................................................................268  
Tray linking does not work........................................................................................................................................................269  
Large jobs do not collate ...........................................................................................................................................................269  
Unexpected page breaks occur...............................................................................................................................................269  
Solving copy problems...................................................................................................................................................270  
Copier does not respond ...........................................................................................................................................................270  
Scanner unit does not close......................................................................................................................................................270  
Poor copy quality..........................................................................................................................................................................270  
Partial document or photo copies..........................................................................................................................................272  
Solving scanner problems.............................................................................................................................................272  
Checking an unresponsive scanner .......................................................................................................................................272  
Scan was not successful .............................................................................................................................................................272  
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer............................................................................................................273  
Poor scanned image quality .....................................................................................................................................................273  
Partial document or photo scans............................................................................................................................................273  
Cannot scan from a computer .................................................................................................................................................274  
Solving fax problems.......................................................................................................................................................274  
Caller ID is not shown..................................................................................................................................................................274  
Cannot send or receive a fax.....................................................................................................................................................274  
Can send but not receive faxes................................................................................................................................................276  
Can receive but not send faxes................................................................................................................................................277  
Received fax has poor print quality........................................................................................................................................277  
Solving option problems................................................................................................................................................278  
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed ....................................................................................278  
Paper trays.......................................................................................................................................................................................278  
2000-sheet tray..............................................................................................................................................................................279  
Envelope feeder ............................................................................................................................................................................279  
Output options ..............................................................................................................................................................................280  
Flash memory card.......................................................................................................................................................................280  
Hard disk with adapter................................................................................................................................................................280  
Internal Solutions Port ................................................................................................................................................................280  
Memory card ..................................................................................................................................................................................280  
Contents  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Solving paper feed problems.......................................................................................................................................281  
Paper frequently jams.................................................................................................................................................................281  
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared ..............................................................................................................281  
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam.........................................................................................281  
Solving print quality problems....................................................................................................................................282  
Isolating print quality problems..............................................................................................................................................282  
Blank pages.....................................................................................................................................................................................282  
Characters have jagged or uneven edges ...........................................................................................................................283  
Clipped images..............................................................................................................................................................................283  
Ghost images..................................................................................................................................................................................283  
Gray background ..........................................................................................................................................................................284  
Incorrect margins..........................................................................................................................................................................284  
Paper curl.........................................................................................................................................................................................285  
Print irregularities .........................................................................................................................................................................285  
Repeating defects.........................................................................................................................................................................286  
Skewed print...................................................................................................................................................................................287  
Solid black or white streaks.......................................................................................................................................................287  
Print is too light .............................................................................................................................................................................288  
Print is too dark..............................................................................................................................................................................289  
Solid color pages...........................................................................................................................................................................290  
Streaked vertical lines .................................................................................................................................................................290  
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page ...............................................................................................291  
Toner rubs off.................................................................................................................................................................................291  
Toner specks...................................................................................................................................................................................292  
Transparency print quality is poor..........................................................................................................................................292  
Embedded Web Server does not open.....................................................................................................................292  
Check the network connections .............................................................................................................................................292  
Check the network settings ......................................................................................................................................................293  
Contacting Customer Support.....................................................................................................................................293  
Notices..............................................................................................294  
Edition notice.....................................................................................................................................................................294  
Industry Canada notices.................................................................................................................................................296  
Power consumption.........................................................................................................................................................304  
Index.................................................................................................311  
Contents  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety information  
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.  
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of  
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
Thisproductusesaprintingprocessthatheatstheprintmedia, andtheheatmaycausethemediatoreleaseemissions.  
Youmustunderstand thesection inyouroperatinginstructionsthat discussestheguidelinesfor selectingprintmedia  
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.  
Use care when you replace a lithium battery.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate  
a lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to move it safely.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury  
or printer damage:  
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.  
• Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the  
same time.  
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.  
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.  
Use only the telecommunications (RJ-11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when  
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system  
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.  
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific  
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not  
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not  
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture  
and walls. If the power cord is misused, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly  
for signs of misuse. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.  
Safety information  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.  
CAUTION—SHOCKHAZARD:Toavoidtheriskofelectricshockwhencleaningtheexterioroftheprinter, unplug  
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product  
ormakeanyelectricalorcablingconnections, suchasthefaxfeature, powercord, ortelephone,duringalightning  
storm.  
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You  
must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an  
input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies,  
and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see  
www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
Safety information  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Learning about the printer  
Finding information about the printer  
Setup information  
Description  
Where to find  
The Setup information gives you instructions for  
You can find the Setup information on the side of the printer  
setting up the printer. Follow the set of instructions box or on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
for local, network, or wireless, depending on what  
you need.  
Help  
Description  
Where to find  
The Help gives you instructions for using the software.  
While in any Lexmark software program, click Help,  
Tips Œ Help, or Help Œ Help Topics.  
Customer support  
Description  
Where to find (North America)  
Where to find (rest of world)  
Call us at  
Telephone numbers and support hours  
vary by country or region.  
Telephone support  
• US: 1-800-332-4120  
Visit our Web site at  
Monday–Friday (8:00 AM–11:00 PM  
ET)  
www.lexmark.com. Select a country or  
region, and then select the Customer  
Support link.  
Saturday (Noon–6:00 PM ET)  
• Canada: 1-800-539-6275  
Note: For additional information about  
contacting Lexmark, see the printed  
warranty that came with your printer.  
Monday–Friday (8:00 AM–11:00 PM  
ET)  
Saturday (Noon–6:00 PM ET)  
• Mexico: 001-888-377-0063  
Monday–Friday (8:00 AM–8:00 PM  
ET)  
Note: Telephone numbers and support  
times may change without notice. For  
the most recent telephone numbers  
available, see the printed warranty  
statement that came with your printer.  
Learning about the printer  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Description  
Where to find (North America)  
Where to find (rest of world)  
For e-mail support, visit our Web site:  
www.lexmark.com.  
E-mail support varies by country or  
region,andmaynotbeavailableinsome  
instances.  
E-mail support  
1 Click SUPPORT.  
Visit our Web site at  
2 Click Technical Support.  
3 Select your printer type.  
4 Select your printer model.  
www.lexmark.com. Select a country or  
region, and then select the Customer  
Support link.  
5 From the Support Tools section,  
Note: For additional information about  
contacting Lexmark, see the printed  
click e-Mail Support.  
6 Complete the form, and then click warranty that came with your printer.  
Submit Request.  
Printer configurations  
Note: Printer configuration may vary depending on your printer model.  
Basic models  
1
2
7
3
2
4
5
6
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Printer control panel  
Standard exit bin  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Multipurpose feeder  
550-sheet tray (Tray 1)  
550-sheet tray (Tray 2)  
Optional output bin  
Learning about the printer  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting a location for the printer  
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install  
any options, leave enough room for them also. It is important to:  
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard.  
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.  
• Keep the printer:  
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators  
– Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations  
– Clean, dry, and free of dust  
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:  
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
Right Side 20 cm (8 in.)  
Left Side 31 cm (12 in.)  
1
2
3
4
5
Front  
Rear  
Top  
51 cm (20 in.)  
20 cm (8 in.)  
31 cm (12 in.)  
Basic functions of the scanner  
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:  
• Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.  
• Send a fax using the printer control panel.  
• Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.  
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.  
• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).  
Learning about the printer  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards  
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings or lightweight carbonless forms).  
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.  
Using the ADF  
The Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) can scan multiple pages, including duplex pages. When using the ADF:  
• Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.  
• Load up to 75 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.  
• Scan sizes from 76.2 x 139.4 mm (3.0 x 5.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).  
• Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).  
• Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).  
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
Using the scanner glass  
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:  
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
• Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).  
• Copy books up to 25.3 mm (1 in.) thick.  
Learning about the printer  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding the printer control panel  
1
2
1
2
ABC  
3
DEF  
4
GHI  
5
JKL  
6
MNO  
7
PQRS  
8
TUV  
9
WXYZ  
0
#
*
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item  
Description  
Display  
Keypad  
1
View scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages.  
Enter numbers or symbols on the display.  
1
2
2
ABC  
3
DEF  
4
GHI  
5
JKL  
6
MNO  
7
PQRS  
8
TUV  
9
WXYZ  
0
#
*
Dial Pause  
3
4
• Press  
to cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To  
field, a Dial Pause is represented by a comma (,).  
• From the home screen, press  
• The button functions only within the Fax menu or with fax functions. When outside  
to redial a fax number.  
of the Fax menu, fax function, or home screen, pressing  
causes an error beep.  
Back  
In the Copy menu, press to delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count.  
The default value of 1 appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing  
times.  
numerous  
In the Fax Destination List, press  
manually. You can also press  
is deleted, another press of  
to delete the right-most digit of a number entered  
to delete an entire shortcut entry. Once an entire line  
causes the cursor to move up one line.  
In the E-mail Destination List, press  
to delete the character to the left of the cursor.  
If the character is in a shortcut, then the shortcut is deleted.  
Home  
5
Press  
to return to the home screen.  
Learning about the printer  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Item  
6
Description  
Start  
• Press  
to initiate the current job indicated on the display.  
to start a copy job with the default settings.  
• From the home screen, press  
• If pressed while a job is scanning, the button has no effect.  
Indicator light  
Indicates the printer status:  
7
8
• Off—The power is off.  
• Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.  
• Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.  
• Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.  
Stop  
Stops all printer activity  
A list of options is offered once Stoppedappears on the display.  
Understanding the home screen  
After the printer is turned on and a short warm-up period occurs, the display shows the following basic screen which  
is referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen buttons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or  
scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.  
1
2
8
Ready  
Touch any button to begin.  
7
6
5
4
3
Display item  
Description  
Copy  
Opens the Copy menus  
1
Note: From the home screen, you can also access the Copy menus by pressing a  
number on the keypad.  
E-mail  
Menus  
Opens the E-mail menus  
2
3
Opens the menus. These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready  
state.  
FTP  
Opens the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus  
4
Note: This function must be set up by your system support person. Once it is set up, it  
appears as a display item.  
Learning about the printer  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Display item  
Description  
Status message bar  
5
• Shows the current printer status such as Readyor Busy.  
• Shows printer conditions such as Toner Low.  
• Shows intervention messages to give instructions on what you should do so the  
printer can continue processing, such as Close dooror Insert print  
cartridge.  
Status/Supplies  
Appears on the display whenever the printer status includes a message requiring  
intervention. Touch it to access the messages screen for more information on the  
message, including how to clear it.  
6
Tips  
Fax  
All menus have a Tips button. Tips is a context-sensitive Help feature within the display  
touch screens.  
7
8
Opens the Fax menus  
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:  
Display item  
Function  
Release Held Faxes  
If this button is shown, then there are held faxes with a scheduled  
hold time previously set. To access the list of held faxes, touch this  
button.  
Search Held Jobs  
Searches on any of the following items and returns search results:  
• User names for held or confidential print jobs  
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs  
• Profile names  
• Bookmark container or job names  
• USB container or job names for supported extensions only  
Held Jobs  
Opens a screen containing all the held jobs  
Lock Device  
This button appears on the screen when the printer is unlocked  
and Device Lockout Personal Identification Number (PIN) has  
been set.  
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the  
correct PIN locks the printer control panel (touch screen and hard  
buttons).  
Unlock Device  
This button appears on the screen when the printer is locked. The  
printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while  
it appears.  
Touching this button opens a PIN entry screen. Entering the  
correct PIN unlocks the printer control panel (touch screen and  
hard buttons).  
Learning about the printer  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display item  
Function  
Cancel Jobs  
OpenstheCancelJobsscreen. TheCancelJobsscreenshowsthree  
headings: Print, Fax, and Network.  
The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and  
Network headings:  
• Print job  
• Copy job  
• Fax profile  
• FTP  
• E-mail send  
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which  
can show only three jobs per screen. Each job appears as a button  
which you can touch to access information about the job. If more  
than three jobs exist in a column, then an arrow appears enabling  
you to scroll through the jobs.  
Using the touch-screen buttons  
Note: Depending on your options and administrative setup, your screens and buttons may vary from those shown.  
Sample touch screen  
Button  
Function  
Home  
Returns to the home screen  
Scroll down  
Opens a drop-down list  
Learning about the printer  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Button  
Function  
Left scroll decrease Scrolls to another value in decreasing order  
Right scroll increase Scrolls to another value in increasing order  
Left arrow  
Right arrow  
Submit  
Scrolls left  
Scrolls right  
Saves a value as the new user default setting  
Back  
Navigates back to the previous screen  
Other touch-screen buttons  
Button  
Function  
Down arrow  
Moves down to the next screen  
Up arrow  
Moves up to the next screen  
Unselected radio button  
This is an unselected radio button. The radio button is gray to show it is  
unselected.  
Learning about the printer  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Button  
Function  
Selected radio button  
This is a selected radio button. The radio button is blue to show it is selected.  
Cancel Jobs  
Opens the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings:  
Print, Fax, and Network.  
The following items are available under the Print, Fax, and Network headings:  
• Print job  
• Copy job  
• Fax profile  
• FTP  
• E-mail send  
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show  
only three jobs per screen. Each job appears as a button which you can touch  
to access information about the job. If more than three jobs exist in a column,  
then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.  
Continue  
Touch this button when more changes need to be made for a job or after  
clearing a paper jam.  
Cancel  
Select  
• Cancels an action or a selection  
• Cancels out of a screen and returns to the previous screen  
Selects a menu or menu item  
Learning about the printer  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Feature  
Description  
Menu trail line:  
A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature acts  
as a trail, showing the path taken to arrive at the current menu. It gives the  
exact location within the menus.  
MenusŒ SettingsŒ Copy  
SettingsŒ Number of Copies  
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item.  
The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you  
touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number  
of Copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not  
become the user default setting.  
Attendance message alert  
If an attendance message occurs which closes a function, such as copy or fax,  
then a solid red dot appears over the function button on the home screen.  
This indicates that an attendance message exists.  
Learning about the printer  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional printer setup  
Installing internal options  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this  
section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.  
Available internal options  
• Memory cards  
– Printer memory  
– Flash memory  
– Fonts  
• Firmware cards  
– Bar Code and Forms  
– IPDS and SCS/TNe  
– PrintCryptionTM  
– PRESCRIBE  
• Printer hard disk  
• LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)  
– RS-232-C Serial ISP  
– Parallel 1284-B ISP  
– MarkNetTM N8150802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP  
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP  
– MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP  
• MarkNet N8110 V-34 Fax Card  
Additional printer setup  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Accessing the system board to install internal options  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Note: This operation requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver.  
1 Open the system board door.  
2 Loosen the screw(s) on the system board cover.  
Additional printer setup  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Remove the system board cover.  
4 Use the illustration below to locate the appropriate connector.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.  
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1
2
4
3
Firmware and flash memory card connectors  
Memory card connector  
1
2
3
4
Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector  
Fax card connector  
Additional printer setup  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a memory card  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board. To install the memory  
card:  
1 Access the system board.  
2
3
1
2 Unpack the memory card.  
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.  
3 Open the memory card connector latches.  
4 Align the notches on the memory card with the ridges on the connector.  
1
2
Notches  
Ridges  
1
2
Additional printer setup  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it snaps into place.  
6 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.  
2
1
3
Installing a flash memory or firmware card  
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be  
installed, but the connectors are interchangeable.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
2
3
1
2 Unpack the card.  
Note: Avoid touching any electrical components on the card.  
Additional printer setup  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.  
Plastic pins  
Metal pins  
1
2
4 Push the card firmly into place.  
Notes:  
• The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.  
• Be careful not to damage the connectors.  
Additional printer setup  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.  
2
1
3
Installing an Internal Solutions Port  
Thesystemboard supports one optionalLexmark InternalSolutions Port (ISP). InstallanISP foradditionalconnectivity  
options.  
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
2
3
1
2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee.  
Note: Avoid touching the components on the card.  
Additional printer setup  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.  
Note: If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must first be removed. To  
remove the hard disk:  
a Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer  
hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch  
before pulling the cable out.  
b Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.  
Additional printer setup  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.  
d Remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and  
then remove the bracket. Set the printer hard disk aside.  
Additional printer setup  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.  
2
1
5 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes in the system board, and then press downward until the tee snaps  
into place. Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely, and that the tee is seated firmly onto the system  
board.  
Additional printer setup  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Install the ISP onto the plastic tee. Angle the ISP over the plastic tee, and then approach the plastic tee so that  
any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage.  
7 Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee.  
8 Insert the long thumbscrew and turn it clockwise enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not tighten the  
thumbscrew at this time.  
Additional printer setup  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage.  
10 Tighten the long thumbscrew.  
Note: Do not overtighten the thumbscrew.  
11 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.  
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.  
12 If a printer hard disk was previously installed, then attach the printer hard disk to the ISP. For more information,  
see “Installing a printer hard disk” on page 38.  
Additional printer setup  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.  
2
1
3
Installing a printer hard disk  
The optional printer hard disk can be installed with or without a Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).  
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver and a flathead screwdriver.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
2
3
1
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.  
Note: Avoid touching the components on the card.  
Additional printer setup  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.  
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.  
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:  
a Using a flathead screwdriver to loosen the screws, remove the thumbscrews that attach the printer hard disk  
mounting bracket to the printer hard disk, and then remove the bracket.  
b Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the ISP, and then press downward on the printer  
hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.  
Additional printer setup  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.  
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.  
To install a printer hard disk directly onto the system board:  
a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk with the holes in the system board, and then press downward on  
the printer hard disk until the standoffs have seated into place.  
Additional printer setup  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b Attach the two provided screws to secure the printer hard disk mounting bracket.  
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.  
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color coded.  
4 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.  
2
1
3
Additional printer setup  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing a fax card  
Note: This task requires a #2 Phillips screwdriver.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory  
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,  
and unplug any cables going into the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch  
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.  
1 Access the system board.  
2
3
1
2 Unpack the fax card.  
3 Remove the metal cover from the fax card opening.  
2
1
Additional printer setup  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Insert the fax card and attach the two provided screws to secure the fax card mounting bracket.  
Additional printer setup  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Insert the plug of the fax card interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.  
6 Replace the system board cover and close the system board door.  
2
1
3
Attaching cables  
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.  
Be sure to match the following:  
• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer  
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port  
Additional printer setup  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
1
USB port  
1
2
Ethernet port  
Verifying printer setup  
Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up  
correctly by printing the following: .  
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed  
options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed  
correctly. Remove the option and install it again.  
• Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup  
page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing  
configuration.  
Printing a menu settings page  
Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify printer options are installed correctly.  
Note: If you have not made any menu item settings changes yet, then the menu settings page lists all the factory  
default settings. Once you select and save other settings from the menus, they replace the factory default settings  
as user default settings. A user default setting remains in effect until you access the menu again, choose another value,  
and save it. To restore the factory default settings, see “Restoring the factory default settings” on page 264.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
Additional printer setup  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Touch Reports.  
4 Touch Menu Settings Page.  
The menu settings page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.  
Printing a network setup page  
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page  
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Reports.  
.
4 Touch Network Setup Page.  
The network setup page prints and the printer returns to the home screen.  
5 Check the first section on the network setup page, and confirm that Status is “Connected.”  
If Status is “Not Connected,” the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult  
a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.  
Setting up the printer software  
Installing printer software  
A printer driver is software that lets the computer communicate with the printer. The printer software is typically  
installed during the initial printer setup. If you need to install the software after setup, follow these instructions:  
For Windows users  
1 Close all open software programs.  
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.  
3 From the main installation dialog, click Install.  
4 Follow the instructions on the screen.  
For Macintosh users  
1 Close all open software applications.  
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.  
3 From the Finder desktop, double-click the printer CD icon that automatically appears.  
4 Double-click the Install icon.  
5 Follow the instructions on the screen.  
Additional printer setup  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Using the World Wide Web  
1 Go to the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
2 From the Drivers & Downloads menu, click Driver Finder.  
3 Select your printer, and then select your operating system.  
4 Download the driver and install the printer software.  
Updating available options in the printer driver  
Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer  
driver to make them available for print jobs.  
For Windows users  
1 Do one of the following:  
In Windows Vista  
a Click  
.
b Click Control Panel.  
c Click Hardware and Sound.  
d Click Printers.  
In Windows XP  
a Click Start.  
b Click Printers and Faxes.  
In Windows 2000  
a Click Start.  
b Click Settings Œ Printers.  
2 Select the printer.  
3 Right-click the printer, and then select Properties.  
4 Click the Install Options tab.  
5 Under Available Options, add any installed hardware options.  
6 Click Apply.  
For Macintosh users  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax.  
3 Select the printer, and then click Options & Supplies.  
Additional printer setup  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Click Driver, and then add any installed hardware options.  
5 Click OK.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
2 Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
3 Select the printer, and then from the Printers menu, choose Show Info.  
4 From the pop-up menu, choose Installable Options.  
5 Add any installed hardware options, and then click Apply Changes.  
Setting up wireless printing  
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless  
network  
Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.  
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.  
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.  
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks.  
Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting. Check with your system support person if you are not  
sure which channel to select.  
• Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:  
– WEP key  
If your network uses more than one WEP key, enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently  
in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key.  
or  
– WPA or WPA2 passphrase  
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be  
set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the  
network.  
– No security  
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.  
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.  
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the Advanced method, then you may need the following:  
• Authentication type  
• Inner authentication type  
• 802.1X username and password  
• Certificates  
Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and  
Documentation CD.  
Additional printer setup  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)  
Before you install the printer on a wireless network, make sure that:  
• Your wireless network is set up and working properly.  
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.  
1 Connect the power cable, and then turn the printer on.  
1
2
Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.  
Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the screen  
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.  
3 Click Install.  
4 Click Agree.  
5 Click Suggested.  
Additional printer setup  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6 Click Wireless Network Attach.  
7 Connect the cables in the following order:  
a Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.  
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable  
so you can print wirelessly.  
b If your printer has faxing capabilities, then connect the telephone cable.  
8 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the software installation.  
9 To allow other computers on the wireless network to use the wireless printer, follow steps 2 through 6 and step  
8 for each computer.  
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)  
Prepare to configure the printer  
1 Locate the printer MAC address on the sheet that came with the printer. Write the last six digits of the MAC address  
in the space provided below:  
MAC address: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___  
2 If your printer has faxing capabilities, then connect the telephone cable.  
Additional printer setup  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Connect the power cable, and then turn the power on.  
1
2
Enter the printer information  
1 Access the AirPort options.  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
b Click Network.  
c Click AirPort.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
b Double-click Internet Connect.  
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.  
2 From the Network pop-up menu, select print server xxxxxx, where the x’s are the last six digits of the MAC  
address located on the MAC address sheet.  
3 Open the Safari browser.  
4 From the Bookmarks drop-down menu, select Show.  
5 Under Collections, select Bonjour or Rendevous, and then double-click the printer name.  
6 From the main page of the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the page where the wireless settings information  
is stored.  
Configure the printer for wireless access  
1 Type the name of your network (SSID) in the appropriate field.  
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode if you are using a wireless router.  
Additional printer setup  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Select the type of security you use to protect your wireless network.  
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to join your wireless network.  
5 Click Submit.  
6 Open the AirPort application on your computer:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
b Click Network.  
c Click AirPort.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
b Double-click Internet Connect.  
c From the toolbar, click AirPort.  
7 From the Network pop-up menu, select your wireless network.  
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly  
To print to a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file and  
create a printer in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
1 Install a PPD file on the computer:  
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.  
b Double-click the installer package for the printer.  
c From the Welcome screen, click Continue.  
d Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.  
e Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the  
agreement.  
f
Select a Destination, and then click Continue.  
g From the Easy Install screen, click Install.  
h Type the user password, and then click OK.  
All necessary software is installed on the computer.  
i
Click Close when installation is complete.  
2 Add the printer:  
a For IP printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax.  
3 Click +.  
4 Select the printer from the list.  
5 Click Add.  
Additional printer setup  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
2 Double-click Utilities.  
3 Locate and double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.  
5 Select the printer from the list.  
6 Click Add.  
b For AppleTalk printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax.  
3 Click +.  
4 Click AppleTalk.  
5 Select the printer from the list.  
6 Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4  
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
2 Double-click Utilities.  
3 Locate and double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
4 From the Printer List, choose Add.  
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.  
6 Click More Printers.  
7 From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.  
8 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.  
9 Select the printer from the list.  
10 Click Add.  
Installing the printer on a wired network  
Use the following instructions to install the printer on a wired network. These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber  
optic network connections.  
Before you install the printer on a wired network, make sure that:  
• You have completed the initial setup of the printer.  
• The printer is connected to your network with the appropriate type of cable.  
For Windows users  
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.  
Wait for the Welcome screen to appear.  
If the CD does not launch after a minute, then do one of the following:  
Additional printer setup  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
In Windows Vista  
a Click  
.
b In the Start Search box, type D:\setup.exe, where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
In Windows XP and earlier  
a Click Start.  
b Click Run.  
c Type D:\setup.exe, where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
2 Click Install Printer and Software.  
3 Click Agree to agree to the License Agreement.  
4 Select Suggested, and then click Next.  
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, using IPv6, or to configure printers using scripts, select  
Custom and follow the on-screen instructions.  
5 Select Wired Network Attach, and then click Next.  
6 Select the printer manufacturer from the list.  
7 Select the printer model from the list, and then click Next.  
8 Select the printer from the list of printers discovered on the network, and then click Finish.  
Note: If your configured printer does not appear in the list of discovered printers, click Add Port and follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
9 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.  
For Macintosh users  
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.  
2 Print the network setup page from the printer. For information on printing a network setup page, see “Printing  
a network setup page” on page 46.  
3 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you  
are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.  
4 Install the drivers and add the printer.  
a Install a PPD file on the computer:  
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD in the CD or DVD drive.  
2 Double-click the installer package for the printer.  
3 From the Welcome screen, click Continue.  
4 Click Continue again after viewing the Readme file.  
5 Click Continue after viewing the license agreement, and then click Agree to accept the terms of the  
agreement.  
6 Select a Destination, and then click Continue.  
7 From the Easy Install screen, click Install.  
Additional printer setup  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Type the user password, and then click OK.  
All the necessary software is installed on the computer.  
9 Click Close when installation is complete.  
b Add the printer:  
• For IP printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax.  
3 Click +.  
4 Select the printer from the list.  
5 Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
2 Double-click Utilities.  
3 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
4 From the Printer List, click Add.  
5 Select the printer from the list.  
6 Click Add.  
• For AppleTalk printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax.  
3 Click +.  
4 Click AppleTalk.  
5 Select the printer from the list.  
6 Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
2 Double-click Utilities.  
3 Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
4 From the Printer List, click Add.  
5 Choose the Default Browser tab.  
6 Click More Printers.  
7 From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.  
8 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.  
9 Select the printer from the list.  
10 Click Add.  
Note: If the printer doesn't show up in the list, you may need to add it using the IP address. Contact your  
system support person for assistance.  
Additional printer setup  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing port settings after installing a new  
network Internal Solutions Port  
When a new network Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on  
computers that access the printer must be updated because the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All  
computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address in order to print to it over the network.  
Notes:  
• If the printer has a static IP address that will stay the same, then you do not need to make any changes to the  
computer configurations.  
• If the computers are configured to print to the printer by a network name that will stay the same, instead of by  
IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.  
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection, then make sure the  
wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the wired connection  
remains connected, then the wireless configuration will complete, but the wireless ISP will not be active. This  
can be fixed by disconnecting the wired connection, turning the printer off, and then turning the printer back  
on again.  
For Windows users  
1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.  
2 Do one of the following:  
In Windows Vista  
a Click  
.
b Click Control Panel.  
c Under Hardware and Sound, click Printer.  
In Windows XP  
a Click Start.  
b Click Printers and Faxes.  
In Windows 2000  
a Click Start.  
b Click Settings Œ Printers.  
3 Locate the printer that has changed.  
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.  
4 Right-click the printer.  
5 Click Properties.  
6 Click the Ports tab.  
7 Locate the port in the list, and then select it.  
8 Click Configure Port.  
Additional printer setup  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9 Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field. You can find the new IP address on the network  
setup page you printed in step 1.  
10 Click OK, and then click Close.  
For Mac users  
1 Print a network setup page and make a note of the new IP address.  
2 Locate the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section of the network setup page. You will need the IP address if you  
are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.  
3 Add the printer:  
• For IP printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
b Click Print & Fax.  
c Click +.  
d Select the printer from the list.  
e Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
b Double-click Utilities.  
c Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.  
d From the Printer List, click Add.  
e Select the printer from the list.  
f
Click Add.  
• For AppleTalk printing:  
In Mac OS X version 10.5  
a From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
b Click Print & Fax.  
c Click +.  
d Click AppleTalk.  
e Select the printer from the list.  
f
Click Add.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier  
a From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
b Double-click Utilities.  
c Double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
d From the Printer List, click Add.  
e Choose the Default Browser tab.  
f
Click More Printers.  
g From the first pop-up menu, choose AppleTalk.  
Additional printer setup  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
h From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk zone.  
i
j
Select the printer from the list.  
Click Add.  
Setting up serial printing  
In serial printing, data is transferred one bit at a time. Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing,  
it is the preferred option when there is agreat deal of distance between the printer andcomputerorwhen an interface  
with a better transfer rate is not available.  
After installing the serial port, you will need to configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate.  
Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the serial port on your printer.  
1 Set the parameters in the printer:  
a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu with port settings.  
b Locate the submenu with serial port settings.  
c Make any necessary changes to the serial settings.  
d Save the new settings.  
e Print a menu settings page.  
2 Install the printer driver:  
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD. It launches automatically.  
If the CD does not launch automatically, do one of the following:  
In Windows Vista  
1 Click  
.
2 In the Start Search box, type D:\setup.exe, where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
In Windows XP and earlier  
1 Click Start.  
2 Click Run.  
3 Type D:\setup.exe, where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.  
b Click Install Printer and Software.  
c Click Agree to accept the Printer Software License Agreement.  
d Click Custom.  
e Make sure Select Components is selected, and then click Next.  
f
Make sure Local is selected, and then click Next.  
g Select the manufacturer of the printer from the menu.  
h Select the printer model from the menu, and then click Add Printer.  
i
j
Click the + beside the printer model under Select Components.  
MakesurethecorrectportisavailableunderSelectComponents.Thisistheportwheretheserialcableattaches  
to the computer. If the correct port is not available, select the port under the Select Port menu, and then click  
Add Port.  
Additional printer setup  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
k Make any configuration changes necessary in the Add a New Port window. Click Add Port to finish adding  
the port.  
l
Make sure the box next to the selected printer model is checked.  
m Select any other optional software you want to install, and then click Next.  
n Click Finish to complete the printer software installation.  
3 Set the COM port parameters:  
After the printer driver is installed, you must set the serial parameters in the communications (COM) port assigned  
to the printer driver.  
The serial parameters in the COM port must match the serial parameters you set in the printer.  
a Open the Device Manager. Do one of the following:  
In Windows Vista  
1 Click  
.
2 Click Control Panel.  
3 Click System and Maintenance.  
4 Click System.  
5 Click Device Manager.  
In Windows XP  
1 Click Start.  
2 Click Control Panel.  
3 Click Performance and Maintenance.  
4 Click System.  
5 From the Hardware tab, click Device Manager.  
In Windows 2000  
1 Click Start.  
2 Click Settings Œ Control Panel.  
3 Click System.  
4 From the Hardware tab, click Device Manager.  
b Click + to expand the list of available ports.  
c Select the communications port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).  
d Click Properties.  
e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer.  
Look for the printer settings under the serial heading on the Menu Settings page you printed earlier.  
f
Click OK, and then close all the windows.  
g Print a test page to verify printer installation. When a test page prints successfully, printer setup is complete.  
Additional printer setup  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up the printer to fax  
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.  
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product  
ormakeanyelectricalorcablingconnections, suchasthefaxfeature, powercord, ortelephone,duringalightning  
storm.  
Choosing a fax connection  
You can connect the printer with equipment such as a telephone, an answering machine, or a computer modem.  
Note: The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall jack. Other devices (such  
as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in the  
setup steps. If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is  
required.  
You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to a telephone line to send and  
receive faxes.  
You can connect the printer to other equipment. See the following table to determine the best way to set up the  
printer.  
Equipment  
Benefits  
Send and receive faxes without using a computer.  
• The printer  
• A telephone cord  
• The printer  
• Use the fax line as a normal telephone line.  
• A telephone  
• Send and receive faxes without using a computer.  
• Two telephone cords  
Receive both incoming voice messages and faxes.  
Send faxes using the computer or the printer.  
• The printer  
• A telephone  
• An answering machine  
• Three telephone cords  
• The printer  
• A telephone  
• A computer modem  
• Three telephone cords  
Additional printer setup  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using an RJ11 adapter  
Country/region  
• United Kingdom  
• Ireland  
• Finland  
• Italy  
• Sweden  
• Netherlands  
• France  
• Norway  
• Denmark  
• Portugal  
To connect your printer to an answering machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment, use the  
telephone line adapter included in the box with the printer in some countries or regions.  
Note: If you have DSL, do not connect the printer using a splitter because the fax feature may not work correctly.  
1 Connect the adapter to the telephone cord that came with the printer.  
Note: The UK adapter is shown. Your adapter may look different, but it will fit the telephone outlet used in your  
location.  
2 Connect the telephone line of your chosen telecommunications equipment to the left outlet of the adapter.  
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US-style (RJ11) telephone line, follow these steps to connect the  
equipment:  
1 Remove the plug from the EXT port  
on the back of the printer.  
Note: Once this plug is removed, any country- or region-specific equipment you connect to the printer by way  
of the adapter, as shown, will not function properly.  
Additional printer setup  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the EXT port  
on the back of the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or  
receiving a fax.  
Country/region  
• Saudi Arabia  
• Israel  
• United Arab Emirates  
• Egypt  
• Bulgaria  
• Czech Republic  
• Belgium  
• Australia  
• Hungary  
• Poland  
• Romania  
• Russia  
• Slovenia  
• Spain  
• South Africa  
• Greece  
• Turkey  
Additional printer setup  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To connect a telephone, an answering machine, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer:  
1 Remove the plug from the back of the printer.  
2 Connect your telecommunications equipment directly to the EXT port  
on the back of the printer.  
Note: Once this plug is removed, any country- or region-specific equipment that you connect to the printer by way  
of the adapter, as shown, will not function properly.  
Country/region  
• Germany  
• Austria  
• Switzerland  
Additional printer setup  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There is a plug installed in the EXT port  
printer.  
of the printer. This plug is necessary for the proper functioning of the  
Note: Do not remove the plug. If you remove it, other telecommunications devices in your home (such as telephones  
or answering machines) may not work.  
Connecting directly to a telephone wall jack in Germany  
Connect the printer directly to a telephone wall jack to send and receive faxes without using a computer.  
Note: In Germany (and some other countries), the printer ships with a special RJ-11 plug in the EXT port. Do not  
remove the RJ-11 plug. It is required for both the fax and telephone to work properly.  
1 Make sure you have a telephone cord (provided with the product) and a telephone wall jack.  
2 Connect one end of the telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer.  
3 Connect the other end of the telephone cord into the N slot of an active telephone wall jack.  
Additional printer setup  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 If you would like to use the same line for both fax and telephone communication, connect a second telephone  
line (not provided) between the telephone and the F slot of an active telephone wall jack.  
5 If you would like to use the same line for recording messages on your answering machine, connect a second  
telephone line (not provided) between the answering machine and the other N slot of the telephone wall jack.  
Connecting to a telephone  
Connect a telephone to the printer to use the fax line as a normal telephone line. Then set up the printer wherever  
your telephone is located to make copies or to send and receive faxes without using a computer.  
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.  
1 Make sure you have the following:  
• A telephone  
• Two telephone cords  
• A telephone wall jack  
Additional printer setup  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Connect one telephone cord to the LINE port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.  
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port  
of the printer.  
4 Connect the other telephone cord to a telephone, and then plug it into the EXT port  
of the printer.  
Connecting to an answering machine  
Connect an answering machine to the printer to receive both incoming voice messages and faxes.  
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.  
1 Make sure you have the following:  
• A telephone  
• An answering machine  
• Three telephone cords  
• A telephone wall jack  
Additional printer setup  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Connect one telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall  
jack.  
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port  
of the printer.  
4 Connect a second telephone cord from the telephone to the answering machine.  
Additional printer setup  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Connect a third telephone cord from the answering machine to the EXT port  
of the printer.  
Connecting to a computer with a modem  
Connect the printer to a computer with a modem to send faxes from the software program.  
Note: Setup steps may vary depending on your country or region.  
1 Make sure you have the following:  
• A telephone  
• A computer with a modem  
• Three telephone cords  
• A telephone wall jack  
2 Connect a telephone cord into the LINE port of the printer, and then plug it into an active telephone wall jack.  
3 Remove the protective plug from the EXT port  
of the printer.  
Additional printer setup  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Connect a second telephone cord from the telephone to the computer modem.  
5 Connect a third telephone cord from the computer modem to the EXT port  
of the printer.  
Setting the outgoing fax name and number  
To have the designated fax name and fax number printed on outgoing faxes:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 Click inside the Station Name box, and then enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.  
6 Click inside the Station Number box, and then enter the printer fax number.  
7 Click Submit.  
Additional printer setup  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the date and time  
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may  
have to reset the date and time. To set the date and time:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Links & Index.  
3 Click Set Date and Time.  
4 Click inside the Manually Set Date & Time box, and then enter the current date and time.  
5 Click Submit.  
Turning Daylight Saving Time on  
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for Daylight Saving Time (DST):  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Links & Index.  
3 Click Set Date and Time.  
4 Select Automatically Observe DST.  
5 Click Submit.  
Additional printer setup  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading paper and specialty media  
This section explains how to load the 250-, 500-, and 2000-sheet trays, and the multipurpose feeder. It also includes  
information about paper orientation, setting the Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.  
Setting the Paper Size and Paper Type  
ThePaperSizesettingisdeterminedbythepositionofthepaperguidesinthetrayforalltraysexceptthemultipurpose  
feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually. The factory default Paper Type  
setting is Plain Paper. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Paper Menu.  
.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.  
5 Touch the arrows for the desired tray until the correct size or type setting appears.  
6 Touch Submit.  
7 Touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Configuring Universal paper settings  
The Universal Paper Size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer  
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper  
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:  
• Units of measure (millimeters or inches)  
• Portrait Width  
• Portrait Height  
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 76 mm (3 x 3 in.); the largest size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).  
Specify a unit of measurement  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
3 Touch Paper Menu.  
4 Touch the down arrow until Universal Setupappears, and then touch Universal Setup.  
5 Touch the left or right arrow to select the desired unit of measure.  
6 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.  
7 Touch the arrows to select the desired width or height.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8 Touch Submit to save your selection.  
Submitting Selectionappears, followed by the Paper menu.  
9 Touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Loading the standard or optional 250-sheet or  
550-sheet tray  
Although the 250-sheet tray and the 550-sheet tray are different in appearance, they require the same process for  
loading paper. Use these instructions to load paper in either tray:  
1 Pull the tray out.  
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busyappears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.  
2 Squeeze the width guide tab inward as shown, and move the width guide to the correct position for the paper  
size being loaded.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Unlockthelengthguide, squeezethelengthguidetabinwardasshown, andslidetheguidetothecorrect position  
for the paper size being loaded.  
2
3
Notes:  
• Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.  
• For standard paper sizes, lock the length guide.  
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the  
edges on a level surface.  
5 Load the paper stack:  
• Print side facedown for single-sided printing  
• Print side faceup for duplex printing  
Note: Paper must be loaded differently in the trays if an optional StapleSmartTM II Finisher is installed.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher  
With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher  
A B C  
ABC  
Single-sided printing  
Single-sided printing  
ABC  
A B C  
Duplex (two-sided) printing  
Duplex (two-sided) printing  
Note: Notice the maximum fill line on the side of the tray which indicates the maximum height for loading paper.  
Do not overload the tray.  
6 If necessary, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and lock the length guide for the paper  
sizes indicated on the tray.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Insert the tray.  
8 If a different type of paper was loaded than the type previously loaded in the tray, then change the Paper Type  
setting for the tray from the printer control panel.  
Loading the 2000-sheet tray  
1 Pull the tray out.  
2 Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3 Unlock the length guide.  
4 Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide, slide the guide to the correct position for the paper  
size being loaded, and then lock the guide.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the  
edges on a level surface.  
6 Load the paper stack:  
• Print side facedown for single-sided printing  
• Print side faceup for duplex printing  
Note: Paper must be loaded differently in the trays if an optional StapleSmart II Finisher is installed.  
Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher  
With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher  
ABC  
A B C  
Single-sided printing  
Single-sided printing  
Loading paper and specialty media  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher  
With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher  
ABC  
A B C  
Duplex (two-sided) printing  
Duplex (two-sided) printing  
Note: Notice the maximum fill line on the side of the tray which indicates the maximum height for loading paper.  
Do not overload the tray.  
7 Insert the tray.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading the multipurpose feeder  
1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.  
2 Pull out the extension until it is fully extended.  
3 Slide the width guide to the far right.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or  
crease them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
Paper  
Envelopes  
Transparencies*  
* Avoid touching the print side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.  
5 Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.  
Without an optional StapleSmart Finisher  
With an optional StapleSmart Finisher  
ABC  
A B C  
Single-sided printing  
Single-sided printing  
Loading paper and specialty media  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Without an optional StapleSmart Finisher  
With an optional StapleSmart Finisher  
A B C  
ABC  
Duplex (two-sided) printing  
Duplex (two-sided) printing  
Notes:  
• Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.  
• Do not load or close a tray while a job is printing.  
• Load only one size and type of media at a time.  
• Load envelopes with the flap side up.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or  
self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.  
6 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the  
multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.  
7 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.  
Loading the envelope feeder  
1 Adjust the envelope support for the length of envelope you are loading:  
• Short envelopes—Fully close the envelope support.  
• Medium-length envelopes—Extend the envelope support to the middle position.  
• Long envelopes—Fully open the envelope support.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2 Lift the envelope weight back toward the printer.  
3 Slide the width guide to the right.  
4 Prepare the envelopes for loading.  
Flex the envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten  
the edges on a level surface.  
5 Load the stack of envelopes flap side down.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or  
self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.  
6 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack.  
7 Lower the envelope weight to touch the paper stack.  
8 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type.  
Linking and unlinking trays  
Linking trays  
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next  
linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.  
The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray  
except the multipurpose feeder. The printer can sense A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, Executive, and Universal paper  
sizes. The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu  
available from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Note: To link the multipurpose feeder, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP Feeder  
Size to appear as a menu item.  
The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Unlinking trays  
Unlinked trays have settings that are not the same as the settings of any other tray.  
To unlink a tray, change the following tray settings so that they do not match the settings of any other tray:  
• Paper Type (for example: Plain Paper, Letterhead, Custom Type <x>)  
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked  
trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type <x>, or define your own custom name.  
• Paper Size (for example: letter, A4, statement)  
Load a different paper size to change the Paper Size setting for a tray automatically. Paper Size settings for the  
multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper  
loaded in the tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Paper may not be  
properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Assigning a custom paper type name  
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking the tray.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 From the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Paper Menu.  
.
4 Touch Paper Size/Type.  
5 Touch the paper type arrows for the desired tray until the correct custom type appears.  
6 Touch the tray number or MP Feeder Type.  
7 Touch Submit.  
Changing a Custom Type <x> name  
You can use the Embedded Web Server or MarkVisionTM to define a name other than Custom Type <x> for each of  
the custom paper types that are loaded. When a Custom Type <x> name is changed, the menus display the new  
name instead of Custom Type <x>.  
To change a Custom Type <x> name from the Embedded Web Server:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Default Settings, click Paper Menu.  
4 Click Custom Names.  
5 Type a name for the paper type in a Custom Name <x> box.  
Note: This custom name will replace a custom type <x> name under the Custom Types and Paper Size/Type  
menus.  
6 Click Submit.  
7 Click Custom Types.  
Custom Typesappears, followed by your custom name.  
8 Select a Paper Type setting from the list next to your custom name.  
9 Click Submit.  
Loading paper and specialty media  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
Paper guidelines  
Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of  
the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.  
Paper characteristics  
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating  
new paper stock.  
Note: For detailed information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the Lexmark  
Web site at www.lexmark.com/publications.  
Weight  
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than  
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb  
bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier  
paper.  
Curl  
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur  
after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in  
hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause  
feeding problems.  
Smoothness  
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper  
is too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield  
points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.  
Moisture content  
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.  
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that  
can degrade its performance.  
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to  
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different  
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.  
Grain direction  
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of  
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
For 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For paper heavier than 176 g/m2, grain  
short is recommended.  
Fiber content  
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the  
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper  
containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.  
For detailed information on paper with recycled fiber content, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on  
page 87.  
Unacceptable paper  
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:  
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers,  
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper  
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer  
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser  
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than 2.3 mm  
( 0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms  
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.  
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers  
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers  
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)  
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)  
• Multiple-part forms or documents  
Selecting paper  
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.  
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:  
• Always use new, undamaged paper.  
• Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on  
the paper package.  
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.  
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.  
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.  
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead  
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:  
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 weight paper.  
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.  
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand  
temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected  
by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.  
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.  
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting  
or releasing hazardous emissions.  
Using recycled paper and other office papers  
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically  
for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study  
demonstrating that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However,  
no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.  
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper  
from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found  
no reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines  
apply to recycled paper.  
• Low moisture content (4–5%)  
• Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)  
Note:Somemuchsmootherpapers(suchaspremium24lblaserpapers,50–90Sheffieldunits)andmuchrougher  
papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in  
laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.  
• Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)  
• Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed  
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper  
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for  
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper  
supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause  
paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing  
conditions).  
Storing paper  
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:  
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label  
manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity  
between 40 and 60%.  
• Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.  
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.  
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights  
Thefollowingtablesprovideinformationonstandardandoptionalpapersourcesandthetypesofpapertheysupport.  
Note: For an unlisted paper size, configure a Universal Paper Size.  
For information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site at  
www.lexmark.com/publications.  
Paper sizes supported by the printer  
Paper size  
Dimensions  
250- or  
550-sheet  
trays  
Optional  
2000-sheet  
tray  
Multipurpose  
feeder  
Duplex unit  
(standard or  
optional)  
210 x 297 mm  
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)  
A4  
148 x 210 mm  
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)  
A5  
X
X
X
A61,2  
105 x 148 mm  
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)  
X
X
182 x 257 mm  
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)  
JIS B5  
Letter  
Legal  
216 x 279 mm  
(8.5 x 11 in.)  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
184 x 267 mm  
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)  
Executive  
Oficio1  
Folio1  
Statement1  
X
X
X
X
216 x 340 mm  
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)  
216 x 330 mm  
(8.5 x 13 in.)  
140 x 216 mm  
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)  
X
1 This size appears in the Paper Size menu only when the paper source does not support size sensing or when size  
sensing is turned off.  
2 Only the standard exit bin supports this size.  
3This size setting formats the page for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software  
application.  
4 To support duplexing, the Universal width must be between 148 mm (5.8 in) and 216 mm (8.5 in); Universal length  
must be between 182 mm (7.2 in) and 356 mm (14 in).  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Paper size  
Dimensions  
250- or  
550-sheet  
trays  
Optional  
2000-sheet  
tray  
Multipurpose  
feeder  
Duplex unit  
(standard or  
optional)  
Universal3,4  
138 x 210 mm  
(5.5 x 8.3 in.) up to  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
X
X
X
X
X
70 x 127 mm  
(2.8 x 5 in.) up to  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
X
148 x 182 mm  
(5.8 x 7.7 in.) up to  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in.)  
7 3/4 Envelope  
(Monarch)  
98 x 191 mm  
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
9 Envelope  
98 x 225 mm  
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)  
105 x 241 mm  
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)  
10 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
Other Envelope  
110 x 220 mm  
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)  
98 x 162 mm  
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to  
176 x 250 mm  
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)  
1 This size appears in the Paper Size menu only when the paper source does not support size sensing or when size  
sensing is turned off.  
2 Only the standard exit bin supports this size.  
3This size setting formats the page for 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software  
application.  
4 To support duplexing, the Universal width must be between 148 mm (5.8 in) and 216 mm (8.5 in); Universal length  
must be between 182 mm (7.2 in) and 356 mm (14 in).  
Note: An optional 250-sheet Universally Adjustable Tray is available for sizes smaller than A5, such as index cards.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper types and weights supported by the printer  
The printer engine supports 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb) paper weights. The duplex unit supports 63–170 g/m2 (17–45 lb)  
paper weights.  
Paper type  
250- or 550-sheet Optional  
trays (standard or 2000-sheet tray  
optional)  
Multipurpose  
feeder  
Duplex unit  
Paper  
• Plain  
• Bond  
• Colored  
• Custom  
• Letterhead  
• Light  
• Heavy  
• Preprinted  
• Rough/Cotton  
• Recycled  
Card stock  
Envelopes  
X
X
X
Labels 1  
• Paper  
• Vinyl  
Transparencies  
1 Printing labels requires a special label fuser cleaner which prevents duplexing. The label fuser cleaner is included  
with the special cartridge required for label applications.  
Paper types and weights supported by the finisher  
Use this table to determine the possible output destinations of print jobs which use supported paper types and  
weights. The paper capacity of each output bin is listed in parentheses. Paper capacity estimations are calculated  
based on 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Finisher supports 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb) paper weights.  
Paper type  
Finisher  
Output Expander  
(550 sheets) or High  
Capacity Output  
Stacker (1850  
sheets)  
5-Bin Mailbox  
(500 sheets)1  
StapleSmart  
Finisher  
(500 sheets2)  
standard bin  
(250 or 550  
sheets)  
Paper  
• Plain  
• Bond  
• Colored  
• Custom  
• Letterhead  
• Light  
• Heavy  
• Preprinted  
• Rough/Cotton  
• Recycled  
Card stock  
Envelopes  
X
X
X
X
X
Labels 3  
• Paper  
• Vinyl  
Transparencies  
X
X
1 Supports 60-90 g/m2 (16-24 lb) paper weights.  
2 Maximum of 50 sheets per stapled packet.  
3 Printing labels requires a special label fuser cleaner which prevents duplexing. The label fuser cleaner is included  
with the special cartridge required for label applications.  
Paper and specialty media guidelines  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards  
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings).  
Making copies  
Making a quick copy  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press  
.
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.  
Copying using the ADF  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 Adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
The copy screen appears.  
Copying  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4 Change the copy settings as needed.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Copying using the scanner glass  
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
2 On the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
The copy screen appears.  
3 Change the copy settings as needed.  
4 Touch Copy It.  
5 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the  
Next Page.  
6 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.  
Copying photos  
1 Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
2 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
3 Touch Options.  
4 Touch Content.  
5 Touch Photograph.  
6 Touch Done.  
7 Touch Copy It.  
8 Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job.  
Copying on specialty media  
Making transparencies  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder and then place  
transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.  
6 Touch the desired size of the transparencies, and then touch Continue.  
Copying  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
7 Touch the arrows until Transparency appears.  
8 Touch Transparency, and then touch Continue.  
9 Touch Copy It.  
Copying to letterhead  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder and place letterhead face up, top edge first in the multipurpose  
feeder.  
6 Touch the desired size of the letterhead, and then touch Continue.  
7 Touch the arrows until Letterheadappears.  
8 Touch Letterhead, and then touch Continue.  
9 Touch Copy It.  
Customizing copy settings  
Copying from one size to another  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then select the size you want the copy to be.  
Note: If you select a paper size that is different from the “Copy from” size, then the printer will scale the size  
automatically.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Copying  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Making copies using paper from a selected tray  
During the copy process, you can select the tray that contains the paper type of choice. For example, if specialty  
media is located in the multipurpose feeder, and you want to make copies on that media:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then identify the size of the original document.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Manual Feeder or the tray that contains the paper type you want.  
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will need to also select the paper size and type.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Copying a document that contains mixed paper sizes  
Use the ADF to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded  
and the “Copy to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled  
to fit a single paper size (Example 2).  
Example 1: Copying to mixed paper sizes  
The printerhas twopaper trays, onetray loadedwithletter-sizepaperand the otherwithlegal-sizepaper. Adocument  
that contains letter- and legal-size pages needs to be copied.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then touch Auto Size Sense.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Auto Size Match.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding  
to the paper sizes of the original document.  
Copying  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Example 2: Copying to a single paper size  
The printer has one paper tray, loaded with letter-size paper. A document that contains letter- and legal-size pages  
needs to be copied.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Copy from, and then touch Mixed Letter/Legal.  
5 Touch Copy to, and then touch Letter.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
The scanner identifies the mixed paper sizes as they scan and then scales the legal-size pages to print on letter-size  
paper.  
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button that looks the way you want your copies duplexed.  
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy.  
For example, select 1-sided to 2-sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2-sided copies.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Reducing or enlarging copies  
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The  
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be  
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.  
To reduce or enlarge a copy:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
Copying  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.  
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.  
5 Touch Copy It.  
Adjusting copy quality  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Content.  
6 Touch the button that best represents what you are copying:  
• Text—Used for original documents that are mostly text or line art  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Used when the original document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print  
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser  
printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
Collating copies  
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the  
copies as groups of pages (not collated).  
Collated  
Not collated  
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off.  
To turn collation off:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the number of copies.  
Copying  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 Touch Off if you do not want your copies collated.  
6 Touch Copy It.  
Placing separator sheets between copies  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Separator Sheets.  
Note: Collate must be On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is Off, the separator  
sheets are added to the end of the print job.  
6 Select one of the following:  
• Between Copies  
• Between Jobs  
• Between Pages  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet  
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single  
sheet of paper.  
Notes:  
• The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B5 JIS.  
• The Copy Size must be set to 100%.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Select a duplex setting.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch Paper Saver.  
7 Select the desired output.  
8 Touch Print Page Borders if you want a box drawn around each page of the copies.  
Copying  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
9 Touch Done.  
10 Touch Copy It.  
Creating a custom job (job build)  
The custom job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each  
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the  
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with  
the same or different parameters.  
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:  
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, a set consists of one page.  
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.  
• If you scan one page using the ADF, a set consists of one page.  
For example:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Custom Job.  
6 Touch On.  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.  
9 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch  
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.  
Note: If required, change the job settings.  
10 If you have another document to scan, load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown  
on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed. Otherwise,  
touch Finish the job.  
Copying  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Job interrupt  
Job interrupt pauses the current print job and lets you print copies.  
Note: The Job Interrupt setting must be On for this feature to function.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 From the printer control panel, press  
.
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.  
Placing information on copies  
Placing the date and time at the top of each page  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Header/Footer.  
6 Pick an area of the page to place the date and time.  
7 Touch Date/Time, and then touch Continue.  
8 Touch Done.  
9 Touch Copy It.  
Placing an overlay message on each page  
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, or Draft. To  
place a message on the copies:  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.  
4 Touch Options.  
5 Touch Overlay.  
Copying  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
6 Touch the button containing the overlay you want to use.  
7 Touch Done.  
8 Touch Copy It.  
Canceling a copy job  
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF  
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel  
Job on the touch screen.  
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.  
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass  
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.  
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.  
Canceling a copy job while the pages are being printed  
1 Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen, or press  
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.  
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
on the keypad.  
The remaining print job is canceled. The home screen appears.  
Understanding the copy screens and options  
Copy from  
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy.  
• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy from” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting  
displayed.  
• When “Copy from” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can copy an original document that contains mixed paper  
sizes.  
• When “Copy from” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original  
document.  
Copy to  
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.  
• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy to” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting  
displayed.  
• If the size settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting  
to accommodate the difference.  
Copying  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
• If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, touch Manual Feeder,  
and manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder.  
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the size of the original document. If a matching  
paper size is not in one of the trays, the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper.  
Scale  
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale  
can also be set for you automatically.  
• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal-size to letter-size paper, setting the  
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document  
information on your copy.  
• Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.  
• Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.  
• Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, Photograph, or Printed Image.  
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document.  
• Printed Image—Used when copying halftone photographs, graphics such as documents printed on a laser  
printer, or pages from a magazine or newspaper that are composed primarily of images  
Sides (Duplex)  
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex)  
of two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided  
copies (simplex) from two-sided original documents.  
Collate  
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The  
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you  
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)  
(3,3,3).  
Options  
Touching the Options button opens a screen where you can change Paper Saver, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job,  
Separator Sheets, Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Header/Footer, Overlay, Content, Advanced Duplex, and Save as Shortcut  
settings.  
Copying  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Paper Saver  
This option lets you print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is also  
called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a  
single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders adds  
or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.  
Advanced Imaging  
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, Scan Edge to Edge, Color Balance, and  
mirror image before you copy the document.  
Custom Job  
This option combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job.  
Separator Sheets  
This option places a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, and print jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn  
from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.  
Margin Shift  
This option increases the size of the margin a specified distance. This can be useful in providing space to bind or hole-  
punch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want. If the additional margin  
is too large, then the copy will be cropped.  
Edge Erase  
This option eliminates smudges or information around the edges of your document. You can choose to eliminate an  
equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase erases whatever is within the  
selected area, leaving nothing printed on that portion of the paper.  
Header/Footer  
This option turns on the Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text and prints them in the specified  
header or footer location.  
Overlay  
This option creates awatermark(or message) thatoverlaysthe content of yourcopy. Youcanchoosebetween Urgent,  
Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word you pick  
will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.  
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a  
button with an icon of that overlay will be available.  
Content  
This option enhances copy quality. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, Photograph, or Printed Image.  
• Text—Use this setting when copying original documents that are mostly text or line art.  
• Text/Photo—Use this setting when copying original documents that are a mixture of text and graphics or  
pictures.  
Copying  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Photograph—Use this setting when copying an original document that is a high-quality photograph or inkjet  
print.  
• Printed Image—Use this setting when copying halftone photographs, documents printed on a laser printer, or  
pages from a magazine or newspaper.  
Advanced Duplex  
This option controls whether the documents are one-sided or two-sided, what orientation your original documents  
have, and how your documents are bound.  
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.  
Save as Shortcut  
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut.  
Improving copy quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text mode?  
• Use text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the copy,  
and preserving images copied from the original document is not a  
concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and  
documents that contain only text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when copying an original document that  
contains a mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business  
graphics, and brochures.  
When should I use Printed Image mode? Use Printed Image mode when copying halftone photographs, graphics  
such as documents printed on a laser printer, or pages from a magazine  
or newspaper  
When should I use Photograph mode? Use Photograph mode when the original document is a high-quality  
photograph or inkjet print.  
Copying  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
E-mailing  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards  
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings).  
You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an  
e-mail from the printer. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.  
Getting ready to e-mail  
Setting up the e-mail function  
For e-mail to operate, it must be turned on in the printer configuration and have a valid IP address or gateway address.  
To set up the e-mail function:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.  
4 Click E-mail Settings.  
5 Click Setup E-mail Server.  
6 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.  
7 Click Add.  
E-mailing  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the e-mail settings  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click E-mail/FTP Settings.  
4 Click E-mail Settings.  
5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.  
6 Click Submit.  
Creating an e-mail shortcut  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.  
4 Click E-mail Shortcut Setup.  
5 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.  
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).  
6 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).  
7 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen  
1 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
2 Type the recipient's e-mail address.  
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.  
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.  
4 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Enter.  
5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.  
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.  
E-mailing  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
E-mailing a document  
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Enter the e-mail address or shortcut number.  
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add.  
5 Touch E-mail It.  
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 Press  
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.  
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add.  
4 Touch E-mail It.  
Sending an e-mail using the address book  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Touch Search Address Book.  
5 Enter the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.  
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To: box.  
To enter additional recipients, press Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to  
add; or search the address book.  
7 Touch E-mail It.  
E-mailing  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Customizing e-mail settings  
Adding e-mail subject and message information  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Type an e-mail address.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch Subject.  
7 Type the e-mail subject.  
8 Touch Done.  
9 Touch Message.  
10 Type an e-mail message.  
11 Touch Done.  
12 Touch E-mail It.  
Changing the output file type  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch E-mail.  
4 Type an e-mail address.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free  
by Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the  
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent  
JPEG.  
E-mailing  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web  
browsers and graphics programs  
• XPS—Creates a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet  
Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer  
7 Touch E-mail It.  
Note: If you selected Encrypted PDF, then enter your password twice.  
Canceling an e-mail  
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears.  
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears or while Scan the Next  
Page/ Finish the Jobappears.  
Understanding e-mail options  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e-mail screen appears with your new  
setting displayed.  
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper  
sizes.  
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original  
document.  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.  
Orientation  
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes  
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.  
Binding  
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.  
E-mail Subject  
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail. You can enter up to 255 characters.  
E-mail File Name  
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.  
E-mailing  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
E-mail Message  
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.  
Resolution  
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.  
Send As  
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by  
Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded  
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.  
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web  
browsers and graphics programs  
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and  
the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned  
on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your e-mail.  
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This  
increases the amount of information saved.  
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the e-mail. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an e-mail  
address.  
Advanced Options  
Touching this button opens a screen where you change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan  
Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.  
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror  
Image before you copy the document  
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job  
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log  
• Scan Preview—Displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is  
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.  
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within  
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.  
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned e-mails will turn out  
E-mailing  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Faxing  
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards  
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings).  
Sending a fax  
Sending a fax using the printer control panel  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.  
To add recipients, touch Next Number, and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or  
search the address book.  
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press  
. The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to”  
box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.  
5 Touch Fax It.  
Faxing  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sending a fax using the computer  
Faxing from a computer lets you send electronic documents without leaving your desk. This gives you the flexibility  
of faxing documents directly from software programs.  
Note:In order to performthis function from your computer, you must use the PostScript printer driver for yourprinter.  
1 From your software program, click File Œ Print.  
2 From the Print window, select your printer, and then click Properties.  
3 Choose the Other Options tab, and then click Fax.  
4 Click OK, and then click OK again.  
5 On the Fax screen, type the name and number of the fax recipient.  
6 Click Send.  
Creating shortcuts  
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web  
Server  
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to  
send a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to  
a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Manage Shortcuts.  
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support  
person.  
4 Click Fax Shortcut Setup.  
5 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.  
To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.  
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).  
6 Assign a shortcut number.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
7 Click Add.  
Faxing  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Enter the fax number.  
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.  
5 Touch Save as Shortcut.  
6 Enter a name for the shortcut.  
7 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect,  
then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
8 Touch Fax It to send the fax, or touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Using shortcuts and the address book  
Using fax shortcuts  
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut numbers  
when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the  
Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut number (1–99999) can  
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number, you can  
quickly and easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 Press  
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.  
Using the address book  
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Touch Search Address Book.  
Faxing  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.  
(Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.)  
6 Touch Search.  
7 Touch the name to add it to the “Fax to” list.  
8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to enter additional addresses.  
9 Touch Fax It.  
Customizing fax settings  
Changing the fax resolution  
Adjusting the resolution setting changes the quality of the fax. Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra  
Fine (slowest speed, best quality).  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.  
7 Touch Fax It.  
Making a fax lighter or darker  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Use the keypad to enter the fax number.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.  
7 Touch Fax It.  
Faxing  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Sending a fax at a scheduled time  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.  
4 Enter the fax number using the numbers on the touch screen or keypad.  
5 Touch Options.  
6 Touch Advanced Options.  
7 Touch Delayed Send.  
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission  
are listed in the Fax Queue.  
8 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.  
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is  
unavailable.  
9 Touch Done.  
10 Touch Fax it.  
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.  
Viewing a fax log  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Reports.  
4 Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.  
Blocking junk faxes  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
Faxing  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5 Click the Block No Name Fax option.  
This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.  
6 In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to  
block.  
Canceling an outgoing fax  
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning  
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears.  
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears or while Scan the Next  
Page/ Finish the Jobappears.  
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to  
memory  
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.  
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.  
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.  
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the  
job you want to cancel.  
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.  
Understanding fax options  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to fax.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The fax screen appears with your new  
setting displayed.  
• When Original Size is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper  
sizes.  
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original  
document.  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photograph. Color can be  
turned on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your scan.  
• Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
Faxing  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This  
increases the amount of information saved.  
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the fax. Color documents can be scanned and sent to a fax destination.  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.  
Resolution  
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a  
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the  
amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.  
• Standard—Suitable for most documents  
• Fine—Recommended for documents with small print  
• Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail  
• Ultra fine—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Advanced Options  
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Delayed Send, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job,  
Transmission Log, Scan Preview, Edge Erase, and Advanced Duplex settings.  
• Delayed Send—Lets you send a fax at a later time or date. After setting up your fax, touch Delayed Send, enter  
the time and date you would like to send your fax, and then touch Done. This setting can be especially useful in  
sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours, or when transmission times  
are cheaper.  
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, the fax is sent the next time the  
printer is turned on.  
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts Background Removal, Contrast, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Mirror  
Image before you fax the document  
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job  
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log  
• Scan Preview—Displays the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning  
is paused, and a preview image appears.  
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within  
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.  
• Advanced Duplex—Controls how many sides and what orientation an original document has, and whether  
original documents are bound along the long edge or the short edge  
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options may not be available on all printer models.  
Faxing  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Improving fax quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text mode?  
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the fax, and  
preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for faxing receipts, carbon copy forms, and  
documents that contain only text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
When should I use Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when faxing an original document that contains  
a mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business  
graphics, and brochures.  
Use Photo mode when faxingphotos printed on a laser printer or taken from  
a magazine or newspaper.  
Holding and forwarding faxes  
Holding faxes  
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually  
or at a scheduled day or time.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 Click Holding Faxes.  
6 Enter a password in the Print Faxes Password box.  
7 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:  
• Off  
• Always On  
• Manual  
• Scheduled  
8 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps. Otherwise, go to step 9.  
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.  
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.  
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.  
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.  
9 Click Add.  
Faxing  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Forwarding a fax  
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e-mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:  
• Print  
• Print and Forward  
• Forward  
6 From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:  
• Fax  
• E-mail  
• FTP  
• LDSS  
• eSF  
7 Click inside the Forward to Shortcut box, and then enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.  
Note: The shortcut number must be a valid shortcut number for the setting that was selected in the “Forward  
to” menu.  
8 Click Submit.  
Faxing  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanning to an FTP address  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards  
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings).  
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be  
sent to the server at a time.  
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes  
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be  
another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer. Sending  
a document to an FTP server is similar to sending a fax. The difference is that you are sending the information over  
your network instead of over the phone line.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
Scanning to an FTP address using the keypad  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.  
4 Type the FTP address.  
5 Touch Send It.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 Press #, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.  
4 Touch Send It.  
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.  
3 On the home screen, touch FTP.  
4 Touch Search Address Book.  
5 Type the name or part of the name you are searching for, and then touch Search.  
6 Touch the name that you want to add to the To: field.  
7 Touch Send It.  
Creating shortcuts  
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the control panel each time you want to send a document to an  
FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for  
creating shortcut numbers: using a computer or using the printer touch screen.  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.  
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support  
person.  
4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.  
5 Enter the appropriate information into the boxes.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6 Enter a shortcut number.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
7 Click Add.  
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen  
1 On the home screen, touch FTP.  
2 Type the address of the FTP site.  
3 Touch Save as Shortcut.  
4 Enter a name for the shortcut.  
5 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect,  
then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.  
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.  
6 Touch Send It to start the scan, or touch  
to return to the home screen.  
Understanding FTP options  
Original Size  
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to copy.  
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with your new  
setting displayed.  
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Letter/Legal, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper  
sizes.  
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original  
document.  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if the original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.  
Orientation  
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes  
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.  
Binding  
Tells the printer whether the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.  
Resolution  
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Send As  
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by  
Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded  
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.  
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web  
browsers and graphics programs  
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and  
the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer  
Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Color can be turned  
on or off with any of the Content choices. Content affects the quality and size of your FTP file.  
• Text—Emphasize sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
• Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
• Photograph—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time  
it takes to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This  
increases the amount of information saved.  
• Color—Sets the scan type and output for the FTP file. Color documents can be scanned and sent to an FTP site,  
computer, e-mail address, or the printer.  
Advanced Options  
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Scan  
Preview, Edge Erase, and Darkness settings.  
• Advanced Imaging—Adjusts image output settings before you scan the document  
– Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output. Click the arrow buttons to increase or  
decrease the white portion.  
– Color Dropout—Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition (OCR) processing. Selecting  
a color eliminates the color from a form, enabling improved OCR capabilities.  
– Contrast—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast.  
– JPEG Quality—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the image compression.  
– Mirror Image—Select this box to create a mirror image scan.  
– Negative Image—Select this box to create a negative image scan.  
– Shadow Detail—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows.  
– Scan edge to edge—Select this box to scan edge to edge.  
– Sharpness—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness.  
• Custom Job (Job Build)—Combines multiple scanning jobs into a single job  
• Transmission Log—Prints the transmission log or transmission error log  
• Scan Preview—Displays the first page of an image before it is included in the FTP file. When the first page is  
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Edge Erase—Eliminates smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate  
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within  
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.  
• Darkness—Adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out  
Improving FTP quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text mode?  
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of sending a  
documenttoanFTPsite, andpreservingimagescopiedfromtheoriginal  
document is not a concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and  
documents that only contain text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
When should I use Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when sending a document to an FTP site that  
contains a mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business  
graphics, and brochures.  
UsePhotomodewhenthe originaldocumentiscomposedmostlyofphotos  
printed on a laser printer or taken from a magazine or newspaper.  
Scanning to an FTP address  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
ADF  
Scanner glass  
Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards  
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings).  
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be  
directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the  
computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the  
printer.  
Scanning to a computer  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Scan Profile.  
3 Click Create.  
4 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.  
5 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.  
6 Enter a scan name.  
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.  
7 Click Submit.  
8 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when  
you are ready to scan your documents.  
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as  
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
c Press  
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen,  
and then touch Profiles.  
d After you enter the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program  
you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.  
9 Return to the computer to view the file.  
The output file is saved in the location you specified or launched in the program you specified.  
Scanning to a flash drive  
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.  
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.  
The Held Jobs screen appears.  
4 Touch Scan to USB drive.  
5 Select the scan settings.  
6 Touch Scan It.  
Understanding scan profile options  
Quick Setup  
This option lets you select preset formats or customize the scan job settings. You can select one of these settings:  
Custom  
Photo - Color JPEG  
Photo - Color TIFF  
Text - BW PDF  
Text - BW TIFF  
Text/Photo - BW PDF  
Text/Photo - Color PDF  
To customize the scan job settings, from the Quick Setup menu, select Custom. Then change the scan settings as  
needed.  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Format Type  
This option sets the output (PDF, JPEG, TIFF, SECURE PDF, or XPS) for the scanned image.  
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by  
Adobe at www.adobe.com.  
• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web  
browsers and graphics programs  
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded  
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.  
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access  
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and  
the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer  
Compression  
This option sets the format used to compress the scanned output file.  
Default Content  
This option tells the printer the original document type. Choose from Text, Text/Photo, or Photo. Content affects the  
quality and size of your scanned file.  
Text—Emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white background  
Text/Photo—Used when the original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures  
Photo—Tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and pictures. This setting increases the time it takes  
to scan, but emphasizes a reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document. This increases  
the amount of information saved.  
Color  
This option tells the printer the color of the original documents. You can select Gray, BW (Black and White), or Color.  
Original Size  
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can  
scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).  
Orientation  
This option tells the printer whether the original document is in portrait or landscape orientation and then changes  
the Sides and Binding settings to match the original document orientation.  
Sides (Duplex)  
This option informs the printer if your original document is simplex (printed on one side) or duplex (printed on both  
sides). This lets the scanner know what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the document.  
Darkness  
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Resolution  
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time  
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.  
Advanced Imaging  
This option lets you adjust Background Removal, Contrast, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Color Dropout before you  
scan the document. It also lets you Scan edge to edge, as a Mirror Image, or as a Negative Image.  
• Background Removal—Adjusts the white portion of the output. Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease  
the white portion.  
• Contrast—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the contrast.  
• Shadow Detail—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the visible detail in the shadows.  
• Sharpness—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the sharpness.  
• Color Dropout—Color dropout is used for form Optical Character Recognition (OCR) processing. Selecting a  
color eliminates the color from a form, enabling improved OCR capabilities.  
• Color Dropout Threshold—Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the amount of color dropout.  
• Scan edge to edge—Select this box to scan edge to edge.  
• Mirror Image—Select this box to create a mirror image scan.  
• Negative Image—Select this box to create a negative image scan.  
Improving scan quality  
Question  
Tip  
When should I use Text mode?  
• Use Text mode when text preservation is the main goal of the scan, and  
preserving images copied from the original document is not a concern.  
• Text mode is recommended for receipts, carbon copy forms, and  
documents that only contain text or fine line art.  
When should I use Text/Photo mode?  
When should I use Photo mode?  
• Use Text/Photo mode when scanning an original document that  
contains a mixture of text and graphics.  
• Text/Photo mode is recommended for magazine articles, business  
graphics, and brochures.  
Use Photo mode when scanning photos printed on a laser printer or taken  
from a magazine or newspaper.  
Scanning to a computer or flash drive  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing  
This chapter covers printing, printer reports, and job cancelation. Selection and handling of paper and specialty  
media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 138 and “Storing  
paper” on page 87.  
Printing a document  
1 Load paper into a tray or feeder.  
2 From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.  
3 Do one of the following:  
For Windows users  
a With a document open, click File Œ Print.  
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup, and then adjust the settings as needed.  
Note: To print on a specific size or type of paper, adjust the paper size or type settings to match the loaded  
paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.  
c Click OK, and then click Print.  
For Macintosh users  
a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:  
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.  
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.  
3 Click OK.  
b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:  
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.  
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.  
2 From the Print dialog and pop-up menus, adjust the settings as needed.  
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or  
select the appropriate tray or feeder.  
3 Click Print.  
Printing on specialty media  
Tips on using letterhead  
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.  
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
• Before loading letterhead, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.  
Printing  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:  
– “Loading the standard or optional 250-sheet or 550-sheet tray” on page 72  
– “Loading the 2000-sheet tray” on page 75  
– “Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 79  
Tips on using transparencies  
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
When printing on transparencies:  
• Feed transparencies from a 250-sheet tray, a 550-sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.  
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure  
transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting,  
or releasing hazardous emissions.  
• Use transparencies that are 138–146 g/m2 (37–39 lb. bond) in weight.  
• To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.  
• Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.  
• We recommend Lexmark part number 12A5010 for A4-size transparencies and Lexmark part number 70X7240  
for letter-size transparencies.  
Tips on using envelopes  
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
When printing on envelopes:  
• Feed envelopes from the multipurpose feeder or the optional envelope feeder.  
• Set the Paper Type to Envelope, and select the envelope size.  
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the  
envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
• For the best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond)  
weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. All-cotton envelopes must not exceed  
90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) weight.  
• Use only new envelopes.  
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:  
– Have excessive curl or twist  
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way  
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing  
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars  
– Have an interlocking design  
– Have postage stamps attached  
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position  
Printing  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
– Have bent corners  
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes  
• Adjust the width guide to fit the width of the envelopes.  
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.  
Tips on using labels  
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.  
Notes:  
• Paper, dual-web paper, polyester, and vinyl labels are supported.  
• When using the duplex unit, specially-designed, integrated, and dual-web paper labels are supported.  
• Printing labels requires a special label fuser cleaner which is included with the special cartridge required for label  
applications. For more information, see “Ordering supplies” on page 256.  
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on  
the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/publications.  
When printing on labels:  
• Feed labels from a 250-sheet tray, a 550-sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.  
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:  
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure  
without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.  
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.  
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets  
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.  
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.  
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.  
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)  
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.  
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6-mm (0.06-in.) strip on the leading and driver edge,  
and use a non-oozing adhesive.  
• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.  
Tips on using card stock  
Cardstockisheavy, single-plyspecialtymedia.Manyofitsvariablecharacteristics,suchasmoisturecontent,thickness,  
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before  
buying large quantities.  
When printing on card stock:  
• Feed card stock from a 250-sheet tray, a 550-sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.  
• Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock.  
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.  
Printing  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or  
other paper handling problems.  
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F)  
without releasing hazardous emissions.  
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting  
introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.  
• Use grain short card stock when possible.  
Printing confidential and other held jobs  
Holding jobs in the printer  
When sending a job to the printer, you can specify that you want the printer to hold the job in memory until you  
start the job from the printer control panel. All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called  
held jobs.  
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to  
process additional held jobs.  
Job type  
Description  
Confidential  
When you send a Confidential print job to the printer, you must create a PIN  
from the computer. The PIN must be four digits using the numbers 0–9. The  
job is held in printer memory until you enter the PIN from the printer control  
panel and choose to print or delete the job.  
Verify  
When you send a Verify print job, the printer prints one copy and holds the  
remaining copies in printer memory. Verify lets you examine the first copy  
to see if it is satisfactory before printing the remaining copies. Once all copies  
are printed, the job is automatically deleted from printer memory.  
Reserve  
Repeat  
When you send a Reserve print job, the printer does not print the job  
immediately. It stores the job in memory so you can print the job later. The  
job is held in memory until you delete it from the Held Jobs menu.  
When you send a Repeat print job, the printer prints all requested copies of  
the job and stores the job in memory so you can print additional copies later.  
You can print additional copies as long as the job remains stored in memory.  
Other types of held jobs include:  
• Profiles from various sources including Lexmark Document Solutions Suite (LDSS)  
• Forms from a kiosk  
• Bookmarks  
• Jobs not printed, which are called parked jobs  
Printing  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing confidential and other held jobs from Windows  
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve  
jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.  
1 With a document open, click File Œ Print.  
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.  
3 Click Other Options, and then click Print and Hold.  
4 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job,  
also enter a four-digit PIN.  
5 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.  
6 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.  
7 Touch your user name.  
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down  
arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.  
8 Touch Confidential Jobs.  
9 Enter your PIN.  
10 Touch the job you want to print.  
11 Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.  
Printing confidential and other held jobs from a Macintosh  
computer  
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after they print. Repeat and Reserve  
jobs continue to be held in the printer until you choose to delete them.  
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.  
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.  
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.  
3 Select your job type (Confidential, Reserve, Repeat, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential job,  
also enter a four-digit PIN.  
4 Click OK or Print, and then go to the printer to release the job.  
5 On the home screen, touch Held jobs.  
6 Touch your user name.  
Note: A maximum of 500 results can be displayed for held jobs. If your name does not appear, touch the down  
arrow until your name appears, or touch Search Held Jobs if there are a large number of held jobs in the printer.  
7 Touch Confidential Jobs.  
8 Enter your PIN.  
9 Touch the job you want to print.  
10 Touch Print, or touch the arrows to increase or decrease the number of copies, and then touch Print.  
Printing  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing from a flash drive  
A USB port is located on the printer control panel. Insert a flash drive to print supported file types. Supported file  
types include: .pdf, .gif, .jpeg, .jpg, .bmp, .png, .tiff, .tif, .pcx, and .dcx.  
Many flash drives are tested and approved for use with the printer. For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site  
at www.lexmark.com.  
Notes:  
• Hi-Speed flash drives must support the Full-speed standard. Flash drives supporting only USB Low-speed  
capabilities are not supported.  
• USB devices must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS (New Technology  
File System) or any other file system are not supported.  
• If selecting an encrypted .pdf file, then enter the file password from the printer control panel.  
• Before printing an encrypted .pdf file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.  
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.  
To print from a flash drive:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.  
Notes:  
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the  
printer ignores the flash drive.  
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is printing other jobs, then Printer Busyappears. After the  
other jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.  
3 Touch the document you want to print.  
Note: Folders found on the flash drive appear as folders. File names are appended by the extension type (for  
example, .jpg).  
Printing  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Touch the arrows if you want to increase the number of printed copies.  
5 Touch Print.  
Note: Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.  
If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print .pdf files  
from the flash drive as held jobs.  
Printing information pages  
Printing a directory list  
A directory list shows the resources stored in flash memory or on the printer hard disk.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
3 Touch Reports.  
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Directoryappears.  
5 Touch Print Directory.  
Printing the print quality test pages  
Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.  
1 Turn the printer off.  
6
MNO  
2
ABC  
2 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
4 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pagesappears.  
5 Touch Print Quality Pages.  
The print quality test pages print.  
6 Touch Back.  
7 Touch Exit Configuration.  
Canceling a print job  
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel  
1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen, or press  
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.  
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.  
on the keypad.  
Printing  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Canceling a print job from the computer  
To cancel a print job, do one of the following:  
For Windows users  
In Windows Vista:  
1 Click  
.
2 Click Control Panel.  
3 Click Hardware and Sound.  
4 Click Printers.  
5 Double-click the printer icon.  
6 Select the job to cancel.  
7 From the keyboard, press Delete.  
In Windows XP:  
1 Click Start.  
2 From Printers and Faxes, double-click the printer icon.  
3 Select the job to cancel.  
4 From the keyboard, press Delete.  
From the Windows taskbar:  
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.  
1 Double-click the printer icon.  
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.  
2 Select a job to cancel.  
3 From the keyboard, press Delete.  
For Macintosh users  
In Mac OS X version 10.5:  
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences.  
2 Click Print & Fax, and then double-click the printer icon.  
3 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.  
4 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.  
In Mac OS X version 10.4 and earlier:  
1 From the Go menu, choose Applications.  
2 Double-click Utilities, and then double-click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
3 Double-click the printer icon.  
Printing  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 From the printer window, select the job to cancel.  
5 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.  
Printing  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing jams  
Jam error messages appear on the control panel display and include the area of the printer where the jam occurred.  
When there is more than one jam, the number of jammed pages is displayed.  
Avoiding jams  
The following hints can help you avoid jams.  
Paper tray recommendations  
• Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.  
• Do not remove trays while the printer is printing.  
• Do not load trays, the multipurpose feeder, or the envelope feeder while the printer is printing. Load them prior  
to printing, or wait for a prompt to load them.  
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.  
• Make sure the guides in the paper trays, multipurpose feeder, or envelope feeder are properly positioned and  
are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes.  
• Push all trays in firmly after loading paper.  
Paper recommendations  
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media. For more information, see “Paper types and weights supported  
by the printer” on page 90.  
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.  
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.  
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.  
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.  
• Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.  
• Store paper per the manufacturer's recommendations.  
Envelope recommendations  
• To reduce wrinkling, use the Envelope Enhance menu in the Paper menu.  
• Do not feed envelopes that:  
– Have excessive curl or twist  
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing  
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars  
– Have an interlocking design  
– Have postage stamps attached  
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position  
– Have bent corners  
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes  
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way  
Clearing jams  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding jam numbers and locations  
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears. Open doors and covers and remove trays to  
access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path.  
The following table lists the jams that can occur and the location of each jam:  
9
9
1
1
6,7,8  
4
2
4
2
5
3
3
Jam numbers Area  
200–202  
230–239  
240–249  
250  
Printer  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Duplex unit  
Paper tray  
Multipurpose feeder  
Envelope feeder  
Optional output bin  
Finisher  
260  
270–279  
280–282  
283  
Stapler  
290–294  
ADF cover  
200 and 201 paper jams  
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.  
2 Lower the multipurpose feeder door.  
Clearing jams  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Push the release latch, and then open the front cover.  
3
4 Lift and pull the print cartridge out of the printer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum on the underside of the cartridge. Use  
the cartridge handle whenever you are holding the cartridge.  
Clearing jams  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Place the print cartridge aside.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not leave the cartridge exposed to light for extended periods.  
Warning—PotentialDamage:Thejammedpapermaybecoveredwithunfusedtonerwhichcanstaingarments  
and skin.  
6 Remove the jammed paper.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
Note: If the paper is not easy to remove, then open the rear door and remove the paper from there.  
7 Align and reinstall the print cartridge.  
8 Close the front cover.  
9 Close the multipurpose feeder door.  
10 Touch Continue.  
202 paper jam  
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam. If the paper is exiting the printer, then pull the paper out,  
and then touch Continue.  
If the paper is not exiting the printer:  
1 Pull down the top rear door.  
2 Remove the jammed paper.  
3 Close the top rear door.  
4 Touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
230–239 paper jams  
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.  
2 Pull the standard tray out.  
3 Pull down the bottom rear door.  
4 Push the tab down.  
5 Remove the jammed paper.  
6 Close the bottom rear door.  
7 Insert the standard tray.  
8 Touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
240–249 paper jams  
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.  
2 Pull the standard tray out.  
3 Remove any jammed paper, and then close the tray.  
4 Touch Continue.  
5 If the jam message persists, then pull out any optional trays.  
6 Remove the jammed paper, and then insert the trays.  
7 Touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
250 paper jam  
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.  
2 Remove the paper from the multipurpose feeder.  
3 Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.  
Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
4 Load the paper into the multipurpose feeder.  
5 Slide the paper guide toward the inside of the tray until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper.  
6 Touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
260 paper jam  
Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam. The envelope feeder feeds envelopes from the bottom  
of the stack; the bottom envelope will be the one that is jammed.  
1 Lift the envelope weight.  
2 Remove all envelopes.  
3 If the jammed envelope has entered the printer and cannot be pulled out, then lift the envelope feeder up and  
then out of the printer, and then set it aside.  
4 Remove the envelope from the printer.  
Note: If you cannot remove the envelope, then the print cartridge will have to be removed. For more information,  
see “200 and 201 paper jams” on page 139.  
5 Reinstall the envelope feeder. Make sure it snaps into place.  
6 Flex and stack the envelopes.  
7 Load the envelopes in the envelope feeder.  
8 Adjust the paper guide.  
9 Lower the envelope weight.  
10 Touch Continue.  
270–279 paper jams  
To clear a jam in the high-capacity output stacker or the 4-bin mailbox:  
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.  
2 If the paper is exiting into a bin, then pull the paper straight out, and then touch Continue.  
If not, then continue with step 3.  
3 Pull down the output bin door or doors.  
4 Remove the jammed paper.  
5 Close the output bin door or doors.  
6 Touch Continue.  
280–282 paper jams  
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.  
2 Pull down the StapleSmart finisher door.  
3 Remove the jammed paper.  
4 Close the StapleSmart finisher door.  
5 Touch Continue.  
Clearing jams  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
283 staple jams  
1 Touch Status/Supplies to identify the location of the jam.  
2 Press the latch to open the stapler door.  
3 Pull the latch of the staple cartridge holder down, and then pull the holder out of the printer.  
Clearing jams  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard, and then remove any loose staples.  
5 Close the staple guard.  
6 Press down on the staple guard until it snaps into place.  
Clearing jams  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Push the cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the cartridge holder clicks into place.  
8 Close the stapler door.  
290–294 paper jams  
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.  
2 Open the ADF cover, and then remove any jammed paper.  
3 Close the ADF cover.  
4 Open the scanner cover, and then remove any jammed pages.  
Clearing jams  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 Open the bottom ADF door, and then remove any jammed pages.  
1
2
6 Close the bottom ADF door and scanner cover.  
7 Touch Restart Job.  
Clearing jams  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding printer menus  
Menus list  
A number of menus are available to make it easy for you to change printer settings. To access the menus,  
touch  
on the home screen.  
Paper Menu  
Reports  
Network/Ports  
Default Source  
Paper Size/Type  
Configure MP  
Menu Settings Page  
Device Statistics  
Network Setup Page  
Network <x> Setup Page  
Wireless Setup Page1  
Shortcut List  
Active NIC  
Standard Network2  
SMTP Setup  
Standard USB  
Parallel <x>  
Serial <x>  
Envelope Enhance  
Substitute Size  
Paper Texture  
Paper Weight  
Fax Job Log  
Paper Loading  
Custom Types  
Custom Names  
Custom Scan Sizes  
Custom Bin Names  
Universal Setup  
Bin Setup  
Fax Call Log  
Copy Shortcuts  
E-mail Shortcuts  
Fax Shortcuts  
FTP Shortcuts  
Profiles List  
NetWare Setup Page  
Print Fonts  
Print Directory  
Asset Report  
1 Only appears if a wireless card is installed.  
2 Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network <x>.  
Security  
Settings  
Help  
Edit Security Setups  
Miscellaneous Security Settings  
Confidential Print  
General Settings  
Copy Settings  
Fax Settings  
Print all guides  
Copy guide  
E-mail guide  
Disc Wiping  
E-mail Settings  
FTP Settings  
Fax guide  
Security Audit Log  
Set Date and Time  
FTP guide  
Flash Drive Menu  
Print Settings  
Information guide  
Print Defects guide  
Supplies Guide  
Understanding printer menus  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper menu  
Default Source menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Default Source  
Tray <x>  
Sets a default paper source for all print jobs  
Notes:  
MP Feeder  
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.  
• Only an installed paper source will appear as a menu setting.  
Envelope Feeder  
Manual Paper  
Manual Env  
• A paper source selected by a print job will override the Default Source  
setting for the duration of the print job.  
• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size  
and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically  
linked. When one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order  
for MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
Paper Size/Type menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Tray <x> Size  
A4  
Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray  
Notes:  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
Letter  
• A4 is the international factory default setting. Letter is the US factory  
default setting.  
• For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the  
hardware appears.  
Legal  
• Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking. If the same  
size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper  
Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When  
one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.  
Executive1  
Oficio1  
Folio  
Statement1  
Universal  
• Automatic size sensing is not supported for Oficio, Folio, or  
Statement paper sizes.  
• The 2000-sheet tray supports A4, Letter, and Legal paper sizes.  
1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.  
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.  
Understanding printer menus  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray  
Tray <x> Type  
Plain Paper  
Card Stock  
Notes:  
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type <x>  
Transparency  
Recycled  
Labels  
Vinyl Labels  
Bond  
Letterhead  
is the factory default setting for all other trays.  
• If available, a user-defined name will appear instead of Custom  
Type <x>.  
• Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking. If the same  
size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper  
Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When  
one tray is empty, the job prints using the linked tray.  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough/Cotton Paper  
Custom Type <x>  
Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder  
MP Feeder Size  
A4  
Notes:  
A5  
A6  
JIS B5  
Letter  
Legal  
Executive  
Oficio  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order  
for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.  
• A4 is the international factory default setting. Letter is the US factory  
default setting.  
• The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense paper size.  
The paper size value must be set.  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
7 3/4 Envelope  
9 Envelope  
10 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
Other Envelope  
1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.  
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.  
Understanding printer menus  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder  
MP Feeder Type  
Plain Paper  
Notes:  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Recycled  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order  
for MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.  
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting.  
Labels  
Vinyl Labels  
Bond  
Envelope  
Rough Envelope  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough/Cotton Paper  
Custom Type <x>  
Envelope Feeder Size  
7 3/4 Envelope  
9 Envelope  
Specifies the envelope size loaded in the envelope feeder  
Note: DL Envelope is the international factory default setting.  
10 Envelope is the US factory default setting.  
10 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
Other Envelope  
Envelope Feeder Type  
Envelope  
Specifies the type of envelope loaded in the envelope feeder  
Notes:  
Rough Envelope  
Custom Type <x>  
• Envelope is the factory default setting.  
• The Custom Type setting can be used to store up to six types of  
envelopes.  
1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.  
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.  
Understanding printer menus  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded  
Manual Paper Size  
A4  
Note: A4 is the international factory default setting. Letter is the US  
A5  
factory default setting.  
A6  
JIS B5  
Letter  
Legal  
Executive  
Oficio  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
Manual Paper Type  
Plain Paper  
Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded  
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Recycled  
Labels  
Vinyl Labels  
Bond  
Letterhead  
Preprinted  
Colored Paper  
Light Paper  
Heavy Paper  
Rough/Cotton Paper  
Custom Type <x>  
Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded  
Manual Envelope Size  
7 3/4 Envelope  
9 Envelope  
Note: DL Envelope is the international factory default setting.  
10 Envelope is the US factory default setting.  
10 Envelope  
DL Envelope  
Other Envelope  
Manual Envelope Type  
Envelope  
Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded  
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.  
Rough Envelope  
Custom Type <x>  
1 Appears only if Tray Size Sensing is turned off.  
Note: Only installed trays, drawers, and feeders are listed in this menu.  
Understanding printer menus  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configure MP menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Configure MP  
Cassette  
Manual  
Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder  
Notes:  
• Cassette is the factory default setting.  
First  
• The Cassette setting configures the multipurpose feeder as an  
automatic paper source.  
• When Manual is selected, the multipurpose feeder can be used only  
for manual feed print jobs.  
• If paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder and First is selected, then  
paper always feeds from the multipurpose feeder first.  
Envelope Enhance  
The envelope conditioner significantly reduces the wrinkling of some envelopes.  
Menu item  
Description  
Enables or disables the envelope conditioner  
Notes:  
Envelope Enhance  
Off  
1 (Least)  
2
3
• The factory default setting is 5.  
• If noise reduction is more important than wrinkle reduction, then  
decrease the setting.  
4
5
6 (Most)  
Substitute Size menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Substitute Size  
Off  
Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not  
available  
Statement/A5  
Letter/A4  
All Listed  
Notes:  
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are  
allowed.  
• The Off setting indicates no size substitutions are allowed.  
• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper  
message appearing.  
Understanding printer menus  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Paper Texture menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Plain Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray  
Card Stock Texture  
Smooth  
Notes:  
Normal  
Rough  
• Normal is the factory default setting.  
• Settings appear only if card stock is supported.  
Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray  
Transparency Texture  
Smooth  
Normal  
Rough  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Recycled Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Labels Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Specifies the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray  
Vinyl Labels Texture  
Smooth  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Bond Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Envelope Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Specifies the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray  
Rough Envelope Texture  
Smooth  
Normal  
Rough  
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Letterhead Texture  
Smooth  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Preprinted Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Colored Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Light Texture  
Smooth  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Heavy Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Rough Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Custom <x> Texture  
Smooth  
Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Rough  
Paper Weight menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Plain Weight  
Light  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded in a specific tray  
Card Stock Weight  
Light  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Understanding printer menus  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Transparency Weight  
Light  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Recycled Weight  
Light  
Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Labels Weight  
Light  
Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Specifies the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray  
Vinyl Labels Weight  
Light  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Bond Weight  
Light  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Envelope Weight  
Light  
Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Rough Envelope Weight Specifies the relative weight of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray  
Light  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Letterhead Weight  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Light  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Preprinted Weight  
Light  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Colored Weight  
Light  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Understanding printer menus  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Light Weight  
Light  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Heavy Weight  
Heavy  
Rough Weight  
Light  
Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded in a specific tray  
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.  
Normal  
Heavy  
Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper type loaded in a specific tray  
Custom <x>  
Light  
Notes:  
Normal  
Heavy  
• Normal is the factory default setting.  
• Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.  
Paper Loading menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Card Stock as the paper type  
Card Stock Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Recycled Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Recycled as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Labels Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Labels as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Vinyl Labels as the paper type  
Vinyl Labels Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Bond as the paper type  
Bond Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Letterhead Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Letterhead as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Notes:  
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from  
Print Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.  
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided jobs.  
Understanding printer menus  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Preprinted as the paper type  
Preprinted Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Colored Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Colored as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Light Loading  
Duplex  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Light as the paper type  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Heavy as the paper type  
Heavy Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Rough as the paper type  
Rough Loading  
Duplex  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Custom <x> Loading  
Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all jobs that  
specify Custom <x> as the paper type  
Duplex  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Custom <x> Loading is available only if the custom type is  
supported.  
Notes:  
• Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from  
Print Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.  
• If Duplex is selected, all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided jobs.  
Custom Types menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom  
Type <x>name or a user-defined Custom Name created from the  
Embedded Web Server or MarkVision Professional  
Custom Type <x>  
Paper  
Card Stock  
Transparency  
Labels  
Vinyl Labels  
Envelope  
Notes:  
• Paper is the factory default setting.  
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or  
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.  
Understanding printer menus  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other  
menus  
Recycled  
Paper  
Card Stock  
Notes:  
Transparency  
Labels  
Vinyl Labels  
Envelope  
• Paper is the factory default setting.  
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or  
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.  
Custom Names menu  
Menu item  
Definition  
Custom Name <x>  
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces a Custom  
Type <x>name in the printer menus.  
<none>  
Custom Scan Sizes menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
Specifies a custom scan size name and options. This name replaces a  
Custom Scan Size <x>name in the printer menus.  
Scan Size Name  
Width  
Notes:  
3–14.17 inches (76–360 mm)  
• 8.5 Inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 216 millimeters  
Height  
is the international factory default setting for Width.  
3–14.17 inches (76–360 mm)  
Orientation  
Landscape  
Portrait  
2 scans per side  
• 14 Inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 356 millimeters  
is the international factory default setting for Height.  
• Landscape is the factory default setting for Orientation.  
• Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.  
• User Default is the factory default setting for ADF Pick Roller Force.  
Off  
On  
ADF Pick Roller Force  
User Default  
30%  
40%  
50%  
60%  
70%  
80%  
Understanding printer menus  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Custom Bin Names menu  
Menu Item  
Standard Bin  
Bin 1  
Description  
Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin  
Specifies a custom name for Bin 1  
Universal Setup menu  
These menu items are used to specify the height, width, and feed direction of the Universal Paper Size. The Universal  
PaperSizeisa user-definedpapersizesetting. Itislistedwiththeotherpaper sizesettingsandincludessimilaroptions,  
such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.  
Menu item  
Description  
Units of Measure  
Inches  
Identifies the units of measure  
Notes:  
Millimeters  
• Inches is the US factory default setting.  
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.  
Portrait Width  
3–14 inches  
Sets the portrait width  
Notes:  
76–360 mm  
• If the width exceedsthemaximum, theprinter usesthemaximum  
width allowed.  
• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be  
increased in 0.01-inch increments.  
• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters  
can be increased in 1-mm increments.  
Sets the portrait height  
Portrait Height  
3–14 inches  
Notes:  
76–360 mm  
• If the height exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the  
maximum height allowed.  
• 14 inches istheUSfactory default setting. Inchescanbeincreased  
in 0.01-inch increments.  
• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters  
can be increased in 1-mm increments.  
Feed Direction  
Short Edge  
Specifies the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either  
direction  
Long Edge  
Notes:  
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.  
• Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the  
maximum width supported in the tray.  
Understanding printer menus  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Bin Setup menu  
Menu Item  
Description  
Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin <x>  
Identifies installed output bins  
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.  
Configure Bins  
Mailbox  
Specifies configuration options for output bins  
Notes:  
Link  
• Mailbox is the factory default setting.  
Mail Overflow  
Link Optional  
Type Assignment  
• The Mailbox setting treats each bin as a separate  
mailbox.  
• The Link setting links together all available output  
bins.  
• The Mail Overflow setting treats each bin as a  
separate mailbox until a bin becomes full, and then  
the printer automatically diverts sheets to an  
overflow bin.  
• The Link Optional setting links together all  
available output bins except the standard bin and  
only appears when at least two optional bins are  
installed.  
• The Type Assignment setting assigns each paper  
type to an output bin.  
Assign Type/Bin  
Plain Paper Bin  
Card Stock Bin  
Transparency Bin  
Recycled Bin  
Labels Bin  
Selects an output bin for each supported paper type  
Available selections for each type are:  
Disabled  
Standard Bin  
Bin <x>  
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.  
Vinyl Labels Bin  
Bond Bin  
Envelope Bin  
Rough Envelope Bin  
Letterhead Bin  
Preprinted Bin  
Colored Bin  
Light Bin  
Heavy Bin  
Rough Bin  
Custom <x> Bin  
Understanding printer menus  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reports menu  
Note: When you select a menu item from the Reports menu, the indicated report prints.  
Menu item  
Description  
Menu Settings Page  
Prints a report containing information about paper loaded into trays,  
installed memory, the total page count, alarms, timeouts, the control panel  
language, the TCP/IP address, the status of supplies, the status of the  
network connection, and other information  
Device Statistics  
Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and  
details about printed pages  
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings,  
such as the TCP/IP address information  
Network Setup Page  
Note: This menu item appears only for network printers or printers  
connected to print servers.  
Network <x> Setup Page  
Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings,  
such as the TCP/IP address information  
Notes:  
• This menu item is available when more than one network option is  
installed.  
• This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected  
to print servers.  
Wireless Setup Page  
Prints a report containing information about the wireless network printer  
settings, such as the TCP/IP address information  
Notes:  
• This menu item is available when a wireless card is installed and  
Lexmark Document Solutions Suite is enabled.  
• This menu item appears only for network printers or printers connected  
to print servers.  
Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts  
Shortcut List  
Fax Job Log  
Fax Call Log  
Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes  
Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted,  
received, and blocked calls  
Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts  
Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts  
Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer  
Copy Shortcuts  
E-mail Shortcuts  
Fax Shortcuts  
FTP Shortcuts  
Profiles List  
Understanding printer menus  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a report containing NetWare-specific information about the network  
settings  
NetWare Setup Page  
Note: This menu item appears only for printers with an internal print server  
installed.  
Print Fonts  
Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently  
set in the printer  
Print Directory  
Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or  
printer hard disk  
Notes:  
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.  
• The optional flash memory or printer hard disk must be installed  
correctly and working properly.  
Asset Report  
Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial  
number and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that  
can be scanned into an asset database.  
Network/Ports menu  
Active NIC menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.  
Active NIC  
Auto  
<list of available network cards>  
Standard Network or Network <x> menus  
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job  
requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
Understanding printer menus  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job  
requires it, regardless of the default printer language  
PS SmartSwitch  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
NPA Mode  
Off  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
Auto  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Network Buffer  
Auto  
Sets the size of the network input buffer  
Notes:  
3K to <maximum size allowed>  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• The value can be changed in 1-K increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the  
printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set  
to On or Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or  
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing. This menu  
only appears if a formatted disk is installed.  
Job Buffering  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
Auto  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The On value buffers jobs on the printer hard disk. This menu selection  
appears only when a formatted disk is installed and is not defective.  
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing  
data from another input port.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Understanding printer menus  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
Mac Binary PS  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
Std Network Setup  
Reports or Network Reports  
Network Card  
TCP/IP  
For descriptions and settings of the network setup menus, see the following:  
• “Network Reports menu” on page 168  
• “Network Card menu” on page 168  
• “TCP/IP menu” on page 169  
• “IPv6 menu” on page 170  
• “Wireless menu” on page 171  
• “AppleTalk menu” on page 171  
• “NetWare menu” on page 172  
• “LexLink menu” on page 172  
IPv6  
AppleTalk  
NetWare  
LexLink  
Net <x> Setup  
Reports or Network Reports  
Network Card  
TCP/IP  
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a  
wireless network.  
IPv6  
Wireless  
AppleTalk  
NetWare  
LexLink  
SMTP Setup menu  
Use the following menu to configure the SMTP server.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies SMTP server port information  
Primary SMTP Gateway  
Primary SMTP Gateway Port  
Secondary SMTP Gateway  
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
SMTP Timeout  
Specifies the amountoftimein seconds before theserver stops trying  
to send the e-mail  
5–30  
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Specifies server information. This is a required item.  
Notes:  
Reply Address  
Use SSL  
Disabled  
Negotiate  
Required  
• The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.  
• Disabled is the factory default setting for Use SSL.  
Understanding printer menus  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e-mail  
privileges  
SMTP Server Authentication  
No authentication required  
Login / Plain  
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.  
CRAM-MD5  
Digest-MD5  
NTLM  
Kerberos 5  
Device-Initiated E-mail  
None  
Use Device SMTP Credentials  
User-Initiated E-mail  
None  
Specifies server information  
Notes:  
• The message boxes have a limitation of 512 characters.  
• None is the factory default setting for Device-Initiated E-mail and  
User-Initiated E-mail.  
Use Device SMTP Credentials  
Use Session User ID and Password  
Use Session E-mail address and Password  
Prompt User  
Device Userid  
Device password  
Kerberos 5 Realm  
NTLM Domain  
Network Reports menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Œ Standard Network or Network <x> Œ Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup Œ Reports or  
Network Reports  
Menu item  
Description  
Print Setup Page  
Prints a report containing information about the current network setup  
Print NetWare Setup Page  
Notes:  
• The Setup Page contains information about the network printer settings,  
such as the TCP/IP address.  
• The NetWare Setup Page menu item appears only on models that support  
NetWare and shows information about NetWare settings.  
Network Card menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Understanding printer menus  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Network/Ports Œ Standard Network or Network <x> Œ Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup Œ Network Card  
Menu item  
Description  
Lets you view the connection status of the Network Card  
View Card Status  
Connected  
Disconnected  
View Card Speed  
Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card  
Lets you view the network addresses  
Network Address  
UAA  
LAA  
Sets the amount of time in seconds that a network print job can take before  
it is canceled  
Job Timeout  
0-225 seconds  
Notes:  
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.  
• If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.  
Allows the printer to print a banner page  
Banner Page  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
TCP/IP menu  
Use the following menu items to view or set the TCP/IP information.  
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Œ Standard Network or Network <x> Œ Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup Œ TCP/IP  
Menu item  
Description  
Activate  
On  
Activates TCP/IP  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
View Hostname  
IP Address  
Lets you view the current TCP/IP hostname  
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Address  
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP  
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that  
support BOOTP and RARP.  
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Netmask  
Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP Gateway  
Netmask  
Gateway  
Understanding printer menus  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting  
Enable DHCP  
On  
Off  
Specifies the RARP address assignment setting  
Enable RARP  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting  
Enable BOOTP  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting  
AutoIP  
Yes  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
No  
Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using  
the File Transfer Protocol.  
Enable FTP/TFTP  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
Enable HTTP Server  
Enables the built-in web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the  
printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser.  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
WINS Server Address  
DNS Server Address  
Lets you view or change the current WINS Server Address  
Lets you view or change the current DNS Server Address  
IPv6 menu  
Use the following menu items to view or set the Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) information.  
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Œ Standard Network or Network <x> Œ Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup Œ IPv6  
Menu item  
Description  
Enable IPv6  
Enables IPv6 in the printer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Auto Configuration  
Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6  
address configuration entries provided by a router  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Lets you view the current setting  
View Hostname  
View Address  
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web  
Server.  
View Router Address  
Understanding printer menus  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Enables DHCPv6 in the printer  
Enable DHCPv6  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Wireless menu  
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.  
Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Œ Network <x> Œ Net <x> Setup Œ Wireless  
Menu item  
Description  
Network Mode  
Infrastructure  
Ad hoc  
Specifies the network mode  
Notes:  
• Infrastructure mode lets the printer access a network using an  
access point.  
• Ad hoc is the factory default setting. Ad hoc mode configures  
the printer for wireless networking directly between it and a  
computer.  
Compatibility  
802.11n  
Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network  
802.11b/g  
802.11b/g/n  
Lets you select an available network for the printer to use  
Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection  
Choose Network  
<list of available networks>  
View Signal Quality  
View Security Mode  
Lets you view the encryption method for the wireless connection.  
“Disabled” indicates that the wireless network is not encrypted.  
AppleTalk menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Œ Standard Network or Network <x> Œ Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup Œ AppleTalk  
Menu item  
Description  
Activate  
On  
Activates AppleTalk support  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Off  
View Name  
Shows the assigned AppleTalk name  
Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Understanding printer menus  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Menu item  
Description  
Shows the assigned AppleTalk address  
View Address  
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Set Zone  
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network  
<list of zones available on the  
network>  
Note: The default setting is the default zone for the network. If no default  
zone exists, the zone marked with an * is the default setting.  
NetWare menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Network/Ports Œ Standard Network or Network <x> Œ Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup Œ NetWare  
Menu item  
Description  
Activates NetWare support  
Activate  
Yes  
Note: No is the factory default setting.  
No  
Lets you view the assigned NetWare login name  
View Login Name  
Print Mode  
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Lets you view the assigned NetWare print mode  
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Network Number  
Lets you view the assigned NetWare network number  
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.  
Enables the Ethernet frame type setting  
Select SAP Frames  
Ethernet 802.2  
Note: On is the factory default setting for all menu items.  
Ethernet 802.3  
Ethernet Type II  
Ethernet SNAP  
Packet Burst  
Reduces network traffic by allowing the transfer and acknowledgement of  
multiple data packets to and from the NetWare server  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
NSQ/GSQ Mode  
Specifies the NSQ/GSQ Mode setting  
Yes  
No  
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.  
LexLink menu  
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:  
Understanding printer menus  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Network/Ports Œ Standard Network or Network <x> Œ Std Network Setup or Net <x> Setup Œ LexLink menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Activates LexLink support  
Activate  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Off  
View Nickname  
Lets you view the assigned LexLink nickname  
Note:TheLexLinknicknamecanbechangedonlyfrom theEmbeddedWeb  
Server.  
Standard USB menu  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job  
received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer  
language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS  
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch setting is Off.  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job  
received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer  
language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL  
SmartSwitch setting is On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch setting is Off.  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
NPA Mode  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Understanding printer menus  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the size of the USB input buffer  
Notes:  
USB Buffer  
Disabled  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
3K to <maximum size  
allowed>  
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on  
the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.  
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the  
printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether the Resource Save  
setting is On or Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce  
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Job Buffering  
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.  
Auto  
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data  
from another input port.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Mac Binary PS  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
USB With ENA  
ENA Address  
Sets the network address, netmask, or gateway information for an external print  
server that is attached to the printer using a USB cable.  
ENA Netmask  
ENA Gateway  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external  
print server through the USB port.  
Understanding printer menus  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parallel <x> menu  
This menu appears only if an optional parallel card is installed.  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job  
received through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer  
language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job  
received through a parallel port requires it, regardless of the default printer  
language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
NPA Mode  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Parallel Buffer  
Disabled  
Sets the size of the parallel input buffer  
Notes:  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
3K to <max size allowed>  
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on  
the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.  
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1K increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the  
printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set  
to On or Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or  
reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Understanding printer menus  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
Job Buffering  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the printer hard disk.  
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.  
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing  
data from another input port.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Advanced Status  
Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• The Off setting disables parallel port negotiation.  
Specifies the parallel port protocol  
Protocol  
Standard  
Fastbytes  
Notes:  
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most  
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.  
• The Standard setting tries to resolve parallel port communication  
problems.  
Determines whether or not the printer honors printer hardware initialization  
requests from the computer  
Honor Init  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the  
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time  
the computer is turned on.  
Determines whether the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing  
edge of strobe  
Parallel Mode 2  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu appears only if a standard or optional parallel port is available.  
Mac Binary PS  
Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting filters print jobs using the standard protocol.  
• The On setting processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.  
Understanding printer menus  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the network address, netmask, orgateway information for an external print  
server that is attached to the printer using a parallel cable.  
Parallel With ENA  
ENA Address  
ENA Netmask  
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external  
print server through a parallel port.  
ENA Gateway  
Serial <x> menu  
This menu appears only if an optional serial card is installed.  
Menu item  
Description  
PCL SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job  
received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer  
language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PostScript emulation if PS  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
PS SmartSwitch  
Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job  
received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer  
language  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not examine incoming data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer uses PCL emulation if PCL  
SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in  
the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.  
Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional  
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol  
NPA Mode  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
• When the On setting is used, the printer performs NPA processing. If the  
data is not in NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.  
• When the Off setting is used, the printer does not perform NPA processing.  
• When the Auto setting is used, the printer examines data, determines the  
format, and then processes it appropriately.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Understanding printer menus  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the size of the serial input buffer  
Notes:  
Serial Buffer  
Disabled  
Auto  
• Auto is the factory default setting.  
3K to <maximum size  
allowed>  
• The Disabled setting turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on  
the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.  
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1-K increments.  
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the  
printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set  
to On or Off.  
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce  
the size of the parallel, USB, and network buffers.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Job Buffering  
Temporarily stores jobs on the printer hard disk before printing  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
Auto  
• The Off setting does not buffer print jobs to the hard disk.  
• The On setting buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.  
• The Auto setting buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing  
data from another input port.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the  
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is updated.  
Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port  
Serial Protocol  
DTR  
Notes:  
DTR/DSR  
XON/XOFF  
XON/XOFF/DTR  
XON/XOFF/DTRDSR  
• DTR is the factory default setting.  
• DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.  
• XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.  
• XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and  
software handshaking settings.  
Determines whether or not the printer communicates availability to the  
computer  
Robust XON  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to  
XON/XOFF.  
Understanding printer menus  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port  
Baud  
1200  
Notes:  
2400  
4800  
• 9600 is the factory default setting.  
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are displayed only in the  
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option or  
Serial Option 2 menus.  
9600  
19200  
38400  
57600  
115200  
138200  
172800  
230400  
345600  
Data Bits  
Specifies the number of data bits that are sent in each transmission frame  
7
8
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.  
Parity  
Even  
Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Odd  
None  
Ignore  
Honor DSR  
Determines whether the printer uses the DSR Signal. DSR is a handshaking  
signal used by most serial cables.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data  
created by electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause  
stray characters to print. Select On to prevent stray characters from  
printing.  
• This menu item appears only if Serial RS-232/RS-422 is set to RS 232.  
Understanding printer menus  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security menu  
Miscellaneous menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Panel Logins  
Login failures  
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer  
control panel before all users are locked out  
Failure time frame  
Lockout time  
Login timeout  
Notes:  
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users  
are locked out. Settings range from 1–50. 3 attempts is the factory default  
setting.  
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login  
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–  
60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.  
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the  
login failures limit. Settings range from 0–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the  
factory default setting. 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout  
time.  
• “Login timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home  
screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–  
900 seconds. 300 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Remote Logins  
Login failures  
Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from a computer  
before all remote users are locked out  
Failure time frame  
Lockout time  
Login timeout  
Notes:  
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users  
are locked out. Settings range from 1–50. 3 attempts is the factory default  
setting.  
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login  
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–  
60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.  
• “Lockout time” specifies how long a user is locked out after exceeding the  
login failures limit. Settings range from 0–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the  
factory default setting. 0 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout  
time.  
• “Login timeout” specifies how long the remote interface remains idle  
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–900  
seconds. 300 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Confidential Print menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Max Invalid PIN  
Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered  
Off  
2–10  
Notes:  
• Off is the default setting.  
• This menu item appears only if a printer hard disk is installed.  
• Once a limit is reached, the jobs for that user name and that PIN are deleted.  
Job Expiration  
Off  
Limits the amount of time a confidential job stays in the printer before it is  
deleted  
1 hour  
Notes:  
4 hours  
24 hours  
1 week  
• Off is the default setting.  
• If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential jobs reside on  
the printer RAM or printer hard disk, the expiration time for those print jobs  
does not change to the new default value.  
• If the printer is turned off, all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are  
deleted.  
Disk Wiping menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Automatic Wiping  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file  
system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk  
is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Off  
On  
Automatic Wiping marks all disk space used by a previous job and does not  
permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been sanitized.  
Only Automatic Wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having  
to take the printer offline for an extended amount of time.  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk  
is installed.  
• Off is the default setting.  
• Due to the large amount of resources required for Automatic Wiping,  
activating this option may decrease printer performance, especially if the  
printer requires hard disk space faster than it can be wiped and returned  
to service.  
Understanding printer menus  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Menu item  
Description  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file  
system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk  
is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Manual Wiping  
Start now  
Do not start now  
Manual Wiping overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from  
a print job that has been processed (i.e. printed). This type of wipe does not  
erase any information related to an unprocessed print job.  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk  
is installed.  
• "Do not start now" is the default setting.  
• If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully  
authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the  
disk wipe.  
Automatic Method  
Single pass  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file  
system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk  
is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Multiple pass  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk  
is installed.  
• Single pass is the default setting.  
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass  
method only.  
Manual Method  
Single pass  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file  
system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk  
is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Multiple pass  
Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk  
space without first having to wipe it.  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk  
is installed.  
• Single pass is the default setting.  
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass  
method only.  
Understanding printer menus  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Disk Wiping erases only print job data that is not currently in use by the file  
system from the printer hard disk. All permanent data on the printer hard disk  
is preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.  
Scheduled Method  
Single pass  
Multiple pass  
Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk  
space without first having to wipe it.  
Notes:  
• This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk  
is installed.  
• Single pass is the default setting.  
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple Pass  
method only.  
• Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or  
confirmation message.  
Security Audit Log menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Export Log  
Enables an authorized user to export the security log  
Notes:  
• To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be  
attached to the printer.  
• From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a  
computer.  
Delete Log  
Delete now  
Specifies whether audit logs are deleted  
Note: Delete Now is the factory default setting.  
Do not delete  
Specifies whether and how the audit logs are created  
Configure Log  
Enable Audit  
Note: Factory default settings enable the security audit log.  
Enable Remote Syslog  
Remote Syslog Facility  
Severity of events to log  
Set Date/Time menu  
Menu item  
Description  
View Date/Time  
Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer  
Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM format.  
Set Date/Time  
<input date/time>  
Time Zone  
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.  
<list of time zones>  
Understanding printer menus  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Menu item  
Description  
Observe DST  
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving  
Time associated with the Time Zone setting.  
On  
Off  
Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a  
network  
Enable NTP  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Settings menu  
General Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Display Language  
English  
Sets the language of the text appearing on the display  
Note: All languages may not be available for all printers.  
Francais  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Espanol  
Dansk  
Norsk  
Nederlands  
Svenska  
Portuguese  
Suomi  
Russian  
Polski  
Magyar  
Turkce  
Cesky  
Simplified Chinese  
Traditional Chinese  
Korean  
Japanese  
Understanding printer menus  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media  
Eco-Mode  
Off  
Notes:  
Energy  
Energy/Paper  
Paper  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to  
its factory default settings.  
• The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the  
printer. Performance may be affectedbut not print quality.  
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media  
needed for a print job by duplexing each page.  
Performance may be affected but not print quality.  
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper  
and specialty media.  
Specifies whether the ADF emits a beep when paper is loaded  
ADF Loaded Beep  
Enabled  
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.  
Disabled  
Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printer  
Notes:  
Quiet Mode  
Off  
On  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• On configures the printer to produce as little noise as  
possible.  
Run Initial setup  
Instructs the printer to run the setup wizard  
Notes:  
Yes  
No  
• Yes is the factory default setting.  
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at  
the Country select screen, the default becomes No.  
Understanding printer menus  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies a language and custom key information for the  
printer control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable  
access to accent marks and symbols from the printer control  
panel keyboard.  
Keyboard  
Keyboard Type  
English  
Francais  
Francais Canadien  
Deutsch  
Italiano  
Espanol  
Dansk  
Norsk  
Nederlands  
Svenska  
Suomi  
Portuguese  
Russian  
Polski  
Swiss German  
Swiss French  
Turkce  
Korean  
Custom Key <x>  
Accents/Symbols Tab  
On  
Off  
Russian/Polish Tab  
On  
Off  
Korean Tab  
On  
Off  
Specifiestheprinterfactorydefaultmeasurements. Thedefault  
is determined by the country/region selection in the initial  
setup wizard.  
Paper Sizes  
U.S.  
Metric  
Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking  
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers  
separated by a semicolon.  
Scan to PC Port Range  
<port range>  
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners  
of the home screen  
Displayed Information  
Left side  
For the Left side and Right side options, choose from the  
following options:  
Right side  
Custom Text <x>  
<text entry>  
None  
IP Address  
Hostname  
Black Toner  
Display When Supply Registers  
Contact Name  
Location  
Date/Time  
Off  
Early Warning  
Low  
mDNS/DDNS Service Name  
Zero Configuration Name  
Cartridge Level  
Custom Text <x>  
Near End of Life  
End of Life  
Type of Message to Display  
Default  
Alternate  
Notes:  
Default Message  
<text entry>  
Alternate Message  
<text entry>  
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.  
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.  
• Off is the factory default setting for Display When Supply  
Registers.  
• Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message  
to Display.  
The displayed information for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and  
Service Errors can be customized with the following options:  
Displayed Information (continued)  
Paper Jam  
Activate  
Load Paper  
Service Errors  
Yes  
No  
Type of Message to Display  
Default  
Alternate  
Default Message  
<text entry>  
Alternate Message  
<text entry>  
Notes:  
• No is the factory default setting for Activate.  
• Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message  
to Display.  
Understanding printer menus  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Additional buttons can be added to the Home screen, and  
default buttons can be removed.  
Home screen customization  
Change Language  
Copy  
Available selections for each button are:  
Display  
Do Not Display  
Copy Shortcuts  
Fax  
Fax Shortcuts  
E-mail  
E-mail Shortcuts  
FTP  
FTP Shortcuts  
Search Held Jobs  
Held Jobs  
USB Drive  
Profiles  
Bookmarks  
Jobs by user  
Date Format  
MM-DD-YYYY  
DD-MM-YYYY  
YYYY-MM-DD  
Formats the printer date  
Formats the printer time  
Time Format  
12 hour A.M./P.M.  
24 hour clock  
Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen  
Screen Brightness  
20–100  
One Page Copy  
Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a  
time  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the amount of light from the standard bin or an optional  
output bin  
Output Lighting  
Standard Bin LED  
Normal/Standby Mode  
Notes:  
Bright  
Dim  
Off  
• In Normal/Standby Mode, the factory default is Bright.  
• In Power Saver Mode, the factory default is Dim.  
Power Saver  
Bright  
Dim  
Off  
Output Option Bin LEDs  
Normal/Standby Mode  
Bright  
Dim  
Off  
Power Saver  
Bright  
Dim  
Off  
Show Bookmarks  
Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs  
area  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting. When On is selected,  
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.  
Specifies whether image background removal is allowed  
during copy, fax, e-mail, FTP, or scan to USB  
Allow Background Removal  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the  
image will be removed.  
Allow Custom Job Scans  
Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, the  
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific  
jobs.  
Scanner Jam Recovery  
Job level  
Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam  
occurs in the ADF  
Page level  
Notes:  
• If Job level is selected, the entire job must be rescanned if  
any pages jam.  
• If Page level is selected, rescan from the jammed page  
forward.  
Web Page Refresh Rate  
Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web  
Server refreshes  
30–300  
Note: 120 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies a contact name for the printer  
Contact Name  
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web  
Server.  
Location  
Specifies the location of the printer  
Note:ThelocationwillbestoredontheEmbeddedWebServer.  
Alarms  
Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator  
intervention  
Alarm Control  
Cartridge Alarm  
Staple Alarm  
Available selections for each alarm type are:  
Off  
Single  
Continuous  
Notes:  
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control.  
Single sounds three quick beeps.  
• Off is the factory default setting for Toner Alarm and Staple  
Alarm. Off means no alarm will sound.  
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.  
• Staple Alarm is available only when the finisher is installed.  
Timeouts  
Job Hold Timeout  
Disabled  
Sets the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention  
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and  
continues to print other jobs in the print queue  
5–255  
Notes:  
• 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is  
installed.  
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system  
enters a lower power state  
Timeouts  
Standby Mode  
Disabled  
Note: 15 minutes is the factory default setting.  
2–240  
Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before some  
systems begin entering a minimum power state.  
Timeouts  
Power Saver Mode  
Disabled  
Notes:  
2–240  
• 60 minutes is the factory default setting.  
• Power Saver does not interact with Standby Mode.  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before  
returning the printer display to a Readystate  
Timeouts  
Screen Timeout  
15–300  
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive  
an end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the  
print job  
Timeouts  
Print Timeout  
Disabled  
1–255  
Notes:  
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in  
the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if  
any new print jobs are waiting.  
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL or PPDS  
emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript  
emulation print jobs.  
Sets the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for  
additional data before canceling a print job  
Timeouts  
Wait Timeout  
Disabled  
Notes:  
15–65535  
• 40 seconds is the factory default setting.  
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using  
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL or  
PPDS emulation print jobs.  
Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain  
offline situations when not resolved within the specified time  
period  
Print Recovery  
Auto Continue  
Disabled  
5–255  
Notes:  
• Disabled is the factory default setting.  
• 5–255 is a range of time in seconds.  
Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages  
Print Recovery  
Jam Recovery  
Notes:  
On  
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints  
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the  
pages is needed for other printer tasks.  
Off  
Auto  
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.  
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.  
Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have  
printed otherwise  
Print Recovery  
Page Protect  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page  
when there is not enough memory to print the whole  
page.  
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the  
entire page prints.  
Understanding printer menus  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Returns the printer settings to the factory default settings  
Factory Defaults  
Do Not Restore  
Restore Now  
Notes:  
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not  
Restore keeps the user-defined settings.  
• Restore returns all printer settings to the factory default  
settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All  
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored  
in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.  
Copy Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Content  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Printed Image  
Text  
Specifies the type of content contained in the copy job  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
original documents are a mixture of text and graphics or pictures.  
• Photograph tells the scanner to pay extra attention to graphics and  
pictures. This setting increases the time it takes to scan, but emphasizes a  
reproduction of the full dynamic range of tones in the original document.  
This increases the amount of information saved.  
• Printed Image is used when jobs are composed primarily of images. Printed  
Image converts the images to halftone. Halftoning makes a grayscale or  
color image printable by transforming it to a pattern of small spots with a  
limited number of colors.  
• Text emphasizes sharp, black, high-resolution text against a clean, white  
background.  
Sides (Duplex)  
1 sided to 1 sided  
1 sided to 2 sided  
2 sided to 1 sided  
2 sided to 2 sided  
Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two-sided) or simplex (one-  
sided), and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex  
Notes:  
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied  
page will have printing on one side.  
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side. The copied  
page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original is six  
sheets, the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.  
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The  
copied page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original  
draft is three sheets of paper with an image on each side of each sheet,  
then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.  
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides. The copy  
mimics the original exactly.  
Understanding printer menus  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Sets two or four sheets of an original document together on the same page  
Paper Saver  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
2 on 1 Portrait  
2 on 1 Landscape  
4 on 1 Portrait  
4 on 1 Landscape  
Print Page Borders  
Specifies whether a border is printed around the edge of the page at the  
margins  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Collate  
On  
Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when making multiple  
copies of the job  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Staple  
On  
Enables stapling  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Original Size  
Letter  
Specifies the paper size of the original document  
Legal  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Letter/Legal  
Specifies the paper source for copy jobs  
Copy To Source  
Tray <x>  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Single Sheet Feeder  
Multi Sheet Feeder  
Auto Size Match  
Understanding printer menus  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Places a sheet of paper between transparencies  
Transparency Separators  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value  
selected  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Separator Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies a paper source  
Manual Feeder  
Envelope Feeder  
Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job  
Darkness  
1–9  
Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin <x>  
Specifies which output bin receives the copy after it is printed  
Specifies the number of copies for the copy job  
Specifies header/footer information for the top left of the page  
Notes:  
Number of Copies  
Header/Footer  
Top left  
Top left  
• Off is the factory default setting for Top left.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Off  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Understanding printer menus  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies header/footer information for the middle of the page  
Header/Footer  
Top middle  
Top middle  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for Top middle.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Header/Footer  
Top right  
Top right  
Specifies header/footer information for the top right of the page  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for Top right.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Off  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom left of the page  
Header/Footer  
Bottom left  
Bottom left  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Off  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Understanding printer menus  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom middle of the page  
Header/Footer  
Bottom middle  
Bottom middle  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Header/Footer  
Bottom right  
Bottom right  
Off  
Specifies header/footer information for the bottom right of the page  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right.  
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for Print on.  
Date/Time  
Page number  
Bates number  
Custom text  
Print on  
All pages  
First page only  
All but first page  
Enter custom text  
Specifies overlay text that is printed on each page of the copy job  
Overlay  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Confidential  
Copy  
Draft  
Urgent  
Custom  
Custom Overlay  
Specifies custom overlay text  
Allow priority copies  
Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you copy in a single copy job a document that contains mixed paper sizes  
On  
Off  
Understanding printer menus  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
Background Removal  
-4 to +4  
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page  
Auto Center  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Specifies which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or  
decrease the dropout  
Color Dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Specifies the contrast used for the copy job  
Contrast  
0–5  
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Mirror Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Negative Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy  
Shadow Detail  
0–4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to copying  
Scan edge to edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a copy  
Sharpness  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Creates a sample copy of the original document  
Sample Copy  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Settings menu  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu  
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.  
General Fax Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Fax Cover Page  
Fax Cover Page  
Off by default  
On by default  
Never Use  
Always Use  
Include To field  
On  
Configures the fax cover page  
Note: Off is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.  
Off  
Include From field  
On  
Off  
From  
Include Message field  
On  
Off  
Message  
Include Logo  
On  
Off  
Include Footer <x>  
Footer <x>  
Station Name  
Specifies the name of the fax within the printer  
Specifies a number associated with the fax  
Specifies how the fax is identified  
Station Number  
Station ID  
Station Name  
Station Number  
Enable Manual Fax  
Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a  
telephone hand set  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax  
number.  
• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.  
Understanding printer menus  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving  
fax jobs  
Memory Use  
All receive  
Mostly receive  
Equal  
Notes:  
• “All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.  
• “Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.  
Mostly sent  
All send  
• Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and  
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.  
• “Mostly sent” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.  
• “All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.  
Cancel Faxes  
Allow  
Specifies whether the printer may cancel fax jobs  
Note: If Cancel Faxes is not enabled, it will not appear as an option.  
Don't Allow  
Caller ID  
FSK  
Specifies type of caller ID being used  
Note: FSK is the factory default setting.  
DTMF  
Fax number masking  
Specifies the direction from which digits are masked in an outgoing fax number  
Off  
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”  
From left  
From right  
setting.  
Digits to mask  
Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number  
0–58  
Fax Send Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Resolution  
Standard  
Fine  
Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print  
quality, but it increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.  
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.  
Super Fine  
Ultra Fine  
Understanding printer menus  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Original Size  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
Legal  
default setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Letter/Legal  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge  
for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Content  
Text  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax  
Notes:  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or  
inkjet print.  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Dial Prefix  
A numeric entry field is provided to enter numbers  
Establishes a dialing prefix rule  
Dialing Prefix Rules  
Prefix Rule <x>  
Understanding printer menus  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified  
number  
Automatic Redial  
0–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Redial Frequency  
Specifies the number of minutes between redials  
1–200  
Behind a PABX  
Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone  
Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs  
Off  
On  
Enable ECM  
On  
Off  
Lets you send faxes by scanning at the printer  
Enable Fax Scans  
On  
Off  
Allows driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer  
Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer  
Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.  
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent  
Driver to fax  
On  
Off  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
On  
Off  
Dial Mode  
Tone  
Pulse  
Max Speed  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
Custom Job scanning  
On  
Off  
Scan Preview  
On  
Off  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
Background Removal  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Lets you automatically center the fax on the page  
Auto Center  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Specifies which color to drop during faxing, and how much to increase or  
decrease the dropout  
Color Dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Contrast  
Best for content  
0–5  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Mirror Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Negative Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax  
Shadow Detail  
0–4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to faxing  
Scan edge to edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a fax  
Sharpness  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Enable Color Fax Scans  
On by default  
Enables color faxing  
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.  
Never use  
Always use  
Off by default  
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white  
Mono Faxes  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
On  
Off  
Understanding printer menus  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Receive Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Allows fax jobs to be received by the printer  
Enable Fax Receive  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job  
Rings to Answer  
1–25  
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.  
Auto Reduction  
Scales an incoming fax job so itfitsthesize of the paper loaded inthedesignated  
fax source  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Paper Source  
Auto  
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an  
incoming fax  
Tray <x>  
Multi-Purpose Feeder  
Specifies an output bin for received faxes  
Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin 1<x>  
Note: Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed.  
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs  
Sides (Duplex)  
On  
Off  
Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received  
fax  
Fax Footer  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received  
Max Speed  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
Fax Forwarding  
Forward  
Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient  
Print  
Print and Forward  
Forward to  
Fax  
Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded  
Note: This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.  
E-mail  
FTP  
LDSS  
eSF  
Forward to Shortcut  
Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-  
mail, FPT, LDSS, or eSF)  
Understanding printer menus  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID  
specified  
Block No Name Fax  
On  
Off  
Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer  
Banned Fax List  
Holding Faxes  
Held Fax Mode  
Off  
Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set schedule  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Always On  
Manual  
Scheduled  
Fax Holding Schedule  
Staple  
On  
Specifies the default staple setting for the attached finisher  
Note: Only the settings associated with the installed finisher appear.  
Off  
Fax Log Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Receive Error Log  
Print Never  
Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error  
Print on Error  
Auto Print Logs  
Enables automatic printing of fax logs  
On  
Off  
Note: Logs print after every 200 jobs.  
Log Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs  
Manual Feeder  
Logs Display  
Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name  
returned  
Remote Station Name  
Dialed Number  
Enable Job Log  
Enables access to the Fax Job log  
Enables access to the Fax Call log  
On  
Off  
Enable Call Log  
On  
Off  
Understanding printer menus  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed  
Log Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin <x>  
Speaker Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Speaker Mode  
Always Off  
Notes:  
• Always Off turns the speaker off.  
On until Connected  
Always On  
• On until Connected is the factory default setting. The speaker is on and  
issues a noise until the fax connection is made.  
• Always On turns the speaker on.  
Controls the volume setting  
Speaker Volume  
High  
Low  
Note: High is the factory default setting.  
Controls the fax speaker ringer volume  
Ringer Volume  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Distinctive Rings  
Menu item  
Description  
Single Ring  
Answers calls with a one-ring pattern  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Double Ring  
Answers calls with a double-ring pattern  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Triple Ring  
Answers calls with a triple-ring pattern  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu  
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.  
Fax Server Setup  
Menu item  
Description  
To Format  
Reply Address  
Subject  
Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch  
screen  
Message  
Understanding printer menus  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies SMTP server port information  
Primary SMTP Gateway  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
Secondary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information  
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.  
Image Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
Specifies the image type for scan to fax  
XPS (.xps)  
TIFF (.tif)  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to fax  
Notes:  
Content  
Text  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or  
inkjet print.  
Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax  
Fax Resolution  
Standard  
Fine  
Super Fine  
Ultra Fine  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
1–9  
Note: 5 factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Landscape  
Understanding printer menus  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Original Size  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
Legal  
default setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Letter/Legal  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files.  
For a multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all  
the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the  
job.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Enable Analog Receive  
Enables analog fax receive  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
E-mail Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
E-mail Server Setup  
Subject  
Specifies e-mail server information  
Note: The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.  
Message  
Understanding printer menus  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the creator of the e-mail  
E-mail Server Setup  
Send me a copy  
Never appears  
On by default  
Off by default  
Always On  
E-mail Server Setup  
Max e-mail size  
Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes  
Note: E-mail above the specified size is not sent.  
0–65535 KB  
E-mail Server Setup  
Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit  
Size Error Message  
E-mail Server Setup  
Sends an e-mail only when the address contains the domain name, such as a  
company domain name  
Limit destinations  
Notes:  
• E-mail can only be sent to the specified domain.  
• The limit is one domain.  
Defines the path name  
E-mail Server Setup  
Web Link Setup  
Server  
Note: Defines the path. For example: /directory/path  
The following characters or symbols are invalid entries for a path name: * : ?  
< > |.  
Login  
Password  
Path  
Base file name  
Web Link  
Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF  
TIFF (.tif)  
Specifies the format of the file  
JPEG (.jpg)  
XPS (.xps)  
PDF Version  
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to e-mail  
1.2–1.6  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
Content  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to e-mail  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or  
inkjet print.  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Understanding printer menus  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color  
Color  
Gray  
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.  
Color  
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned  
Resolution  
75  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Original Size  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
Legal  
default setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Letter/Legal  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge  
for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Understanding printer menus  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of  
the image  
JPEG Quality  
Best for content  
5–90  
Notes:  
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
E-mail images sent as  
Attachment  
Specifies how the images will be sent  
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.  
Web Link  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files.  
For a multiple-page scan to e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing  
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the  
job.  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Specifies whether the transmission log prints  
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Log Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies a paper source for printing e-mail logs  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Manual Env  
MP Feeder  
Log Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin <x>  
Specifies an output bin for the printed e-mail log  
E-mail Bit Depth  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images  
when Color is set to Off.  
8 bit  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Custom Job scanning  
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job  
On  
Off  
Scan Preview  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts  
Notes:  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
On  
Off  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the E-mail  
Destination screen.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Auto Center  
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Color Dropout  
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or  
decrease the dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Contrast  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Mirror Image  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Negative Image  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image  
Shadow Detail  
0–4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Sharpness  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fields  
Use cc:/bcc:  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
FTP Settings menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF  
TIFF (.tif)  
Specifies the format of the FTP file  
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.  
JPEG (.jpg)  
XPS (.xps)  
PDF Version  
Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP  
1.2–1.6  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
Content  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTP  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or  
inkjet print  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Color  
Gray  
Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or color  
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.  
Color  
Resolution  
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned  
75  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
Lightens or darkens the output  
Darkness  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Understanding printer menus  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Original Size  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
Legal  
default setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Letter/Legal  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge  
for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
JPEG Quality  
Best for content  
5–90  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of  
the image  
Notes:  
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files.  
For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing  
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the  
job.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Understanding printer menus  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether the transmission log prints  
Transmission Log  
Print log  
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.  
Do not print log  
Print only for error  
Log Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies a paper source for FTP logs  
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.  
Manual Feeder  
Manual Env  
MP Feeder  
Log Output Bin  
Standard Bin  
Bin <x>  
Specifies an output bin for the FTP log  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images  
when Color is set to Off  
FTP bit Depth  
8 bit  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Base File Name  
Lets you enter a base file name  
Custom Job Scanning  
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job  
On  
Off  
Scan Preview  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Allow Save as Shortcut  
Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses  
On  
Off  
Note: On is the factory default setting.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Auto Center  
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or  
decrease the dropout  
Color Dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Contrast  
0–5  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Mirror Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Negative Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image  
Shadow Detail  
0–4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image  
Sharpness  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Flash Drive menu  
Scan Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Format  
PDF (.pdf)  
Secure PDF  
TIFF (.tif)  
Specifies the format of the file  
JPEG (.jpg)  
XPS (.xps)  
Understanding printer menus  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned to USB  
PDF Version  
1.2–1.6  
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.  
Content  
Text/Photo  
Photograph  
Text  
Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to USB  
Notes:  
• Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the  
documents are mostly text or line art.  
• Photograph is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or  
inkjet print  
• Text is used when the document is mostly text.  
Color  
Gray  
Specifies whether job prints in grayscale or color  
Note: Gray is the factory default setting.  
Color  
Resolution  
Specifies how many dots per inch are scanned  
75  
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.  
150  
200  
300  
400  
600  
Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the output  
1–9  
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Specifies the orientation of the scanned image  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Understanding printer menus  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scanned  
Original Size  
Letter  
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory  
Legal  
default setting.  
Executive  
Folio  
Statement  
Universal  
4 x 6 in.  
3 x 5 in.  
Business Card  
Custom Scan Size <x>  
A4  
A5  
Oficio (Mexico)  
A6  
JIS B5  
Book Original  
Auto Size Sense  
Mixed Letter/Legal  
Sides (Duplex)  
Off  
Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page  
Notes:  
Long edge  
Short edge  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for  
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation).  
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge  
for portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation).  
Photo JPEG Quality  
Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of  
the image  
5–90  
Notes:  
• 50 is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
JPEG Quality  
Best for content  
5–90  
Sets the quality of a JPEG text or text/photo image in relation to file size and  
the quality of the image.  
Notes:  
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.  
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.  
• This menu item applies to Text, Text/Photo, and all scan functions.  
Understanding printer menus  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files.  
For a multiple-page scan to USB job, either one TIFF file is created containing  
all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the  
job.  
Use Multi-Page TIFF  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.  
Scan bit Depth  
Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images  
when Color is set to Off  
8 bit  
1 bit  
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.  
Base File Name  
Lets you enter a base file name  
Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single job  
Custom Job scanning  
Off  
On  
Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs  
Scan Preview  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Background Removal  
Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy  
-4 to +4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Lets you automatically center the copy on the page  
Auto Center  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or  
decrease the dropout  
Color Dropout  
Color Dropout  
None  
Notes:  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.  
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.  
Default Red Threshold  
0–255  
Default Green Threshold  
0–255  
Default Blue Threshold  
0–255  
Specifies the contrast of the output  
Contrast  
0–5  
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.  
Best for content  
Creates a mirror image of the original document  
Mirror Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Creates a negative image of the original document  
Negative Image  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image  
Shadow Detail  
0–4  
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.  
Scan edge to edge  
Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image  
Sharpness  
0–5  
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.  
Print Settings  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the number of copies to print  
Copies  
Paper Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print from  
the flash drive  
MP Feeder  
Manual Paper  
Manual Envelope  
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies  
Collate  
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)  
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.  
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.  
Sides (Duplex)  
Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing)  
On  
Off  
Enables stapling  
Staple  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Off  
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back  
of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page  
Duplex Binding  
Long Edge  
Short Edge  
Notes:  
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.  
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait  
pages and the top edge of landscape pages.  
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait  
pages and the left edge of landscape pages.  
Understanding printer menus  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the orientation of the print job  
Orientation  
Auto  
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.  
Portrait  
Landscape  
N-up (pages/side)  
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper.  
This is also referred to as Paper Saver.  
Off  
2 Up  
3 Up  
4 Up  
6 Up  
9 Up  
12 Up  
16 Up  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.  
N-up Border  
None  
Prints a border around each page image when using N-up  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Solid  
N-up Ordering  
Horizontal  
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using N-up  
Notes:  
Reverse Horizontal  
Reverse Vertical  
Vertical  
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.  
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images  
are in portrait or landscape orientation.  
Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs based on the value  
selected  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Specifies a paper source  
Separator Source  
Tray <x>  
Manual Feeder  
Envelope Feeder  
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job  
Blank Pages  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print Settings  
Setup menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the default printer language  
Notes:  
Printer Language  
PCL Emulation  
PS Emulation  
• PCL emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print  
jobs. PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for  
processing print jobs.  
• PCL is the factory default printer language.  
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent  
a software program from sending print jobs that use  
another printer language.  
Job Waiting  
Specifies that print jobs be removed from the print queue if  
they require unavailable printer options or custom settings.  
They are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print  
normally. When the missing information and/or options are  
obtained, the stored jobs print.  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• This menu appears only if a non-Read Only printer hard  
disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs  
are not deleted if the printer loses power.  
Print Area  
Normal  
Sets the logical and physical printable area  
Notes:  
Whole Page  
• This menu does not appear if Edge to Edge is enabled in  
the printer Setup menu.  
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to  
print data in the non-printable area defined by the Normal  
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.  
• TheWholePagesettingallowstheimagetobemovedinto  
the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, but  
the printer will clip the image at the Normal setting  
boundary.  
• The Whole Page setting only affects pages printed using  
a PCL 5e interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages  
printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.  
Understanding printer menus  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Sets the storage location for downloads  
Notes:  
Download Target  
RAM  
Flash  
Disk  
• RAM is the factory default setting.  
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard  
disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads  
remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even  
when the printer is turned off.  
• Storing downloads in RAM is temporary.  
• This menu appears only if a flash and/or disk option is  
installed.  
Job Accounting  
Specifies whether the printer stores statistical information  
about the most recent print jobs on the hard disk  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off means the printer  
does not store job statistics.  
• Thestatisticsincludearecordofprinterrors, theprinttime,  
the job size in bytes, the requested paper size and type,  
the total number of printed pages, and the total number  
of copies requested.  
• Job Accounting is available only when a printer hard disk  
is installed and working properly. It should not be  
Read/Write or Write protected. Job Buffer Size should not  
be set to 100%.  
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and  
then exiting the menus causes the printer to reset. The  
menu selection is updated.  
Resource Save  
Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such  
as fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives  
a job that requires more memory than is available  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to  
retain the downloads only until memory is needed.  
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.  
• The On setting retains the downloads during language  
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of  
memory,38 Memory Fullappears, anddownloadsare  
not deleted.  
Understanding printer menus  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are  
printed when Print All is selected  
Print All Order  
Alphabetically  
Newest First  
Notes:  
Oldest First  
• Alphabetically is the factory default setting.  
• Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the  
printer control panel.  
Finishing menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether duplex (2-sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs  
Sides (Duplex)  
2 sided  
Notes:  
1 sided  
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.  
• To set 2-sided printing from the software program: for Windows users, click  
File Œ Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup;  
for Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from  
the Print dialog and pop-up menus.  
Duplex Binding  
Long Edge  
Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back  
of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the page  
Short Edge  
Notes:  
• Long Edge is the factory default setting.  
• Long Edge specifies that binding be placed on the left edge of portrait  
pages and the top edge of landscape pages.  
• Short Edge specifies that binding be placed on the top edge of portrait  
pages and the left edge of landscape pages.  
Copies  
Specifies a default number of copies for each print job  
1–999  
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.  
Blank Pages  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
Collate  
Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies  
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)  
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages will be collated.  
• The On setting stacks the print job sequentially.  
• Both settings print the entire job the number of times specified by the  
Copies menu setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted  
Notes:  
Separator Sheets  
None  
Between Copies  
Between Jobs  
Between Pages  
• None is the factory default setting.  
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if  
Collation is set to On. If Collation is set to Off, a blank page is inserted  
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all  
page 2's.  
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.  
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job.  
This setting is useful when printing transparencies or inserting blank pages  
in a document for notes.  
Separator Source  
Tray <x>  
Specifies the paper source for separator sheets  
Notes:  
Multi-Purpose Feeder  
Envelope Feeder  
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.  
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for  
Multi-Purpose Feeder to appear as a menu setting.  
N-up (pages-side)  
Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a sheet of paper  
Off  
Notes:  
2-Up  
3-Up  
4-Up  
6-Up  
9-Up  
12-Up  
16-Up  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.  
N-up Ordering  
Horizontal  
Specifies the positioning of multiple-page images when using N-up  
(pages-sides)  
Reverse Horizontal  
Reverse Vertical  
Vertical  
Notes:  
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.  
• Positioning depends on the number of images and whether the images  
are in portrait or landscape orientation.  
Specifies the orientation of a multiple-page sheet  
Orientation  
Auto  
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait  
Landscape  
Portrait  
and landscape.  
N-up Border  
None  
Prints a border around each page image when using N-up (pages-sides)  
Note: None is the factory default setting.  
Solid  
Understanding printer menus  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether print jobs are stapled  
Staple Job  
Off  
On  
Notes:  
• This menu item is available only when the StapleSmart Finisher is installed.  
• Off is the factory default setting. Print jobs are not stapled.  
• Envelopes are not stapled.  
Offset Pages  
Off  
Stacks copies or print jobs into staggered sets in an output bin  
Notes:  
Between Jobs  
Between Copies  
• This menu item appears only when the StapleSmart Finisher is installed.  
• Off is the factory default setting. No pages are offset during the print job.  
• Between Jobs offsets each print job.  
• Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job.  
Quality menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the printed output resolution  
Print Resolution  
300 dpi  
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting. The printer driver default is 1200 IQ.  
600 dpi  
1200 dpi  
1200 Image Q  
2400 Image Q  
Pixel Boost  
Off  
Enhances the printed quality of small fonts and graphics  
Notes:  
Fonts  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• Fonts applies this setting only to text.  
• Horizontally darkens horizontal lines of text and images.  
• Vertically darkens vertical lines of text and images.  
• Both Directions darkens horizontal and vertical lines on text and images.  
Horizontally  
Vertically  
Both Directions  
Toner Darkness  
Lightens or darkens the printed output  
1–10  
Notes:  
• 8 is the factory default setting.  
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.  
Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps,  
electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts  
Enhance Fine Lines  
On  
Off  
Notes:  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the network  
printer IP address in a browser window.  
Understanding printer menus  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Adjusts the gray value of printed output  
Gray Correction  
Auto  
Off  
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts or darkens printed output and conserves toner  
Notes:  
Brightness  
-6 to +6  
• 0 is the factory default setting.  
• A negative value will darken text, images, and graphics. A positive value will  
lighten them and conserve toner.  
Adjusts the degree of difference between levels of gray in printed output  
Contrast  
0–5  
Notes:  
• 0 is the factory default setting.  
• Higher settings show more difference between levels of gray.  
Utilities menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Remove Held Jobs  
Confidential  
Held  
Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk  
Notes:  
• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.  
Bookmarks, jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not  
affected.  
Not Restored  
All  
• Selecting Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that were not  
restored from the disk.  
Format Flash  
Formats the flash memory. Flash memory refers to the memory added by  
installing a flash memory option card in the printer.  
Yes  
No  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash  
memory is formatting.  
Notes:  
• A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating  
properly for this menu item to be available. The flash memory option card  
must not be Read/Write or Write protected.  
• Selecting Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.  
• No cancels the format request.  
Delete Downloads on Disk Removesdownloadsfromtheprinterharddisk, includingallheldJobs, buffered  
jobs, and parked jobs. Job accounting information is not affected.  
Delete Now  
Do Not Delete  
Note: Delete Now is the default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a list of all stored job statistics or deletes the information from the printer  
hard disk  
Job Acct Stat  
Print  
Clear  
Notes:  
• A printer hard disk must be installed in the printer and operating properly  
for this menu item to be available.  
• Selecting Print prints a list of statistics.  
• Clear deletes all job statistics stored on the printer hard disk.  
• The Clear selection will not appear if Job Accounting is set to  
MarkTrackTM using NPA.  
Hex Trace  
Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem  
Activate  
Notes:  
• When Activate is selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in  
hexadecimal and character representation and control codes are not  
executed.  
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer.  
Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of black on a page. The  
estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.  
Coverage Estimator  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Adjusts the contrast lighting of the display  
Notes:  
LCD Contrast  
1–10  
• 5 is the factory default setting.  
• A higher setting makes the display appear lighter.  
• A lower setting makes the display appear darker.  
Adjusts the brightness of the backlight on the display  
LCD Brightness  
1–10  
Notes:  
• 5 is the factory default setting.  
• A higher setting makes the display appear lighter.  
• A lower setting makes the display appear darker.  
PDF menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Scales page content to fit the selected paper size  
Scale to Fit  
Yes  
No  
Note: No is the factory default setting.  
Prints annotations in a PDF  
Annotations  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PostScript menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Prints a page containing the PostScript error  
Print PS Error  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Establishes the font search order  
Notes:  
Font Priority  
Resident  
Flash/Disk  
• Resident is the factory default setting.  
• A formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk must be  
installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to  
be available.  
• The flash memory option or printer hard disk cannot be Read/Write,  
Write, or password protected.  
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.  
PCL Emul menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item  
Font Source  
Resident  
Disk  
Notes:  
• Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set  
Download  
Flash  
All  
of fonts downloaded into printer RAM.  
• Flash and Disk settings appear only if applicable and show all fonts  
resident in that option.  
• Flash and Disk options must be properly formatted and cannot be  
Read/Write, Write, or password protected.  
• Download appears only if applicable and shows all the fonts  
downloaded into printer RAM.  
• All shows all fonts available to any option.  
Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored  
Notes:  
Font Name  
<list of available fonts>  
• Courier 10 is the factory default setting.  
• The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk,  
and D for download.  
Understanding printer menus  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies the symbol set for each font name  
Symbol Set  
10U PC-8  
Notes:  
12U PC-850  
• 10U PC-8 is the US factory default setting.  
• 12U PC-850 is the international factory default setting.  
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters,  
punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different  
languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific  
text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts  
Pitch  
Notes:  
0.08–100  
• 10 is the factory default setting.  
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).  
• Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.  
• For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display  
but cannot be changed.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Orientation  
Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page  
Notes:  
Portrait  
Landscape  
• Portrait is the factory default setting.  
• Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.  
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the  
page.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Lines per Page  
Specifies the number of lines that print on each page  
Notes:  
1–255  
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default  
setting.  
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the  
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired  
Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.  
Sets the printer to print on A4-size paper  
Notes:  
PCL Emulation Settings  
A4 Width  
198 mm  
203 mm  
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.  
• The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing  
of eighty 10-pitch characters.  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Specifies whether theprinterautomatically performsa carriage return after  
a line feed control command  
Auto CR after LF  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed after a  
carriage return control command  
PCL Emulation Settings  
Auto LF after CR  
On  
Off  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Tray Renumber  
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use  
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders  
Assign MP Feeder  
Off  
Notes:  
None  
0–199  
Assign Tray <x>  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• None is not an available selection. It appears only when it is selected  
by the PCL 5 interpreter.  
Off  
None  
0–199  
• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command.  
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.  
Assign Manual Paper  
Off  
None  
0–199  
Assign Man Env  
Off  
None  
0–199  
Lets you view the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or  
feeder, even if it has not been installed  
Tray Renumber  
View Factory Def  
MPF Default = 8  
T1 Default = 1  
T2 Default = 4  
T3 Default = 5  
T4 Default = 20  
T5 Default = 21  
Env Default = 6  
MPaper Default = 2  
MEnv Default = 3  
Tray Renumber  
Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default  
settings  
Restore Defaults  
Yes  
No  
Understanding printer menus  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HTML menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Intl CG Times  
Intl Courier  
Intl Univers  
Joanna MT  
Letter Gothic  
Lubalin Gothic  
Marigold  
Sets the default font for HTML documents  
Font Name  
Albertus MT  
Antique Olive  
Apple Chancery  
Arial MT  
Notes:  
• The Times font will be used in HTML documents that do not  
specify a font.  
• The following fonts appear only if the appropriate DBCS font card  
is installed: HG-GothicB, MSung-Light, MD_DotumChe, and  
MingMT-Light.  
Avant Garde  
Bodoni  
Bookman  
Chicago  
MonaLisa Recut  
Monaco  
Clarendon  
Cooper Black  
Copperplate  
Coronet  
New CenturySbk  
New York  
Optima  
Oxford  
Courier  
Palatino  
Eurostile  
Garamond  
Geneva  
StempelGaramond  
Taffy  
Times  
Gill Sans  
Goudy  
TimesNewRoman  
Univers  
Helvetica  
Zapf Chancery  
Hoefler Text  
Menu item  
Description  
Font Size  
Sets the default font size for HTML documents  
1–255 pt  
Notes:  
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.  
• Font size can be increased in 1-point increments.  
Scale  
Scales the default font for HTML documents  
1–400%  
Notes:  
• 100% is the factory default setting.  
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Sets the page orientation for HTML documents  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Margin Size  
Sets the page margin for HTML documents  
8–255 mm  
Notes:  
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.  
• Margin size can be increased in 1-mm increments.  
Understanding printer menus  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Menu item  
Description  
Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents  
Backgrounds  
Do Not Print  
Print  
Note: Print is the factory default setting.  
Image menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Auto Fit  
On  
Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation  
Notes:  
Off  
• On is the factory default setting.  
• The On setting overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images.  
Invert  
On  
Inverts bi-tonal monochrome images  
Notes:  
Off  
• Off is the factory default setting.  
• The font size can be increased in 1-point increments.  
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.  
Scales the image to fit the selected paper size  
Scaling  
Anchor Top Left  
Best Fit  
Anchor Center  
Fit Height/Width  
Fit Height  
Notes:  
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.  
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.  
Fit Width  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Sets the image orientation  
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.  
Landscape  
Rev Portrait  
Rev Landscape  
XPS menu  
Menu item  
Description  
Print Error Pages  
Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup  
errors  
Off  
On  
Note: Off is the factory default setting.  
Understanding printer menus  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Help menu  
The Help menu consists of Help pages that are stored in the printer as PDFs. They contain reference information  
about using the printer and performing tasks. You may select to print each one individually, or select Print all  
guidesto print all of them at one time.  
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer. Other translations are available on the  
Software and Documentation CD.  
Menu item  
Print all guides  
Copy guide  
E-mail guide  
Description  
Prints all the guides  
Provides information about making copies and changing settings  
Provides information about sending e-mails using addresses, shortcut  
numbers, or the address book, and changing settings  
Fax guide  
FTP guide  
Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut  
numbers, or the address book, and changing settings  
Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server  
using an FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and changing  
settings  
Information guide  
Print defects guide  
Supplies guide  
Provides help in locating additional information  
Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints  
Provides part numbers for ordering supplies  
Understanding printer menus  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Understanding printer messages  
List of status and error messages  
Answering  
The printer is answering a fax call. Wait for the message to clear.  
Busy  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Call complete  
A fax call is completed. Wait for the message to clear.  
Change <src> to <x>  
<src> is a tray or feeder, and <x> is a paper size or type.  
You can change the current paper source for the remainder of the print job. The formatted page will print on the  
paper loaded in the selected tray. This may cause clipping of text or images. Try one or more of the following:  
• Select the paper tray with the correct paper size or type.  
• Touch Use current [src] to ignore the message and print from the tray selected for the print job.  
• Touch Continue to continue the job if the correct size and type are loaded in the tray, and this size and type are  
specified in the printer control panel Paper menu.  
Note: If you touch Continue when there is no paper in the tray, the job is not continued.  
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the current job.  
Check tray <x> connection  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Turn the printer off and then back on.  
If the error occurs a second time:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the tray.  
4 Reattach the tray.  
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
6 Restart the printer.  
If the error occurs again:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
Understanding printer messages  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3 Remove the tray.  
4 Contact Customer Support.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the tray.  
Close door or insert cartridge  
The cartridge is missing or not installed correctly. Insert the cartridge and close all doors and covers.  
Close finisher side door  
Close the side door on the finisher.  
Connect <x>bps  
The fax is connected. Wait for the message to clear.  
Note: <x> is the baud rate per second.  
Dialing  
A fax number is dialed. If the number is too long to fit on the screen, only the word Dialingappears. Wait for the  
message to clear.  
Disk corrupted  
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard  
disk must be reformatted.  
Touch Reformat disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message.  
Note: Reformatting the disk deletes all the files currently stored on the disk.  
Disk Full - Scan Job Canceled  
The scan job canceled or stopped due to insufficient printer hard disk space.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
Fax failed  
The fax failed to be sent. Wait for the message to clear.  
Fax memory full  
There is not enough memory to send the fax job.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
Understanding printer messages  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.  
The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system  
support person.  
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.  
The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.  
Fax Station Name not set up  
The Fax Station Name has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.  
Fax Station Number not set up  
The Fax Station Number has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.  
Flushing buffer  
Wait for the message to clear.  
Insert staple cartridge  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Insert a staple cartridge to clear the message.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple feature.  
Insert Tray <x>  
Insert the specified tray into the printer.  
Understanding printer messages  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Install bin <x>  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Install the specified bin:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Install the specified bin.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Restart the printer.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Install envelope feeder  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Install the envelope feeder:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Install the envelope feeder.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Restart the printer.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Install Tray <x>  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Install the specified tray:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Install the specified tray.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Restart the printer.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Invalid PIN  
Enter a valid PIN.  
Job stored for delayed transmission  
The scanning completed for a delayed send fax job. Wait for the message to clear.  
Line busy  
A fax number is dialed, but the fax line is busy. Wait for the message to clear.  
Understanding printer messages  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Load <src> with <x>  
<src> is a tray or feeder, and <x> is a paper type or size.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the tray.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find  
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default source.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Load manual feeder with <x>  
<x> is a paper type or size.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the specified paper in the multipurpose feeder.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot  
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default source.  
• Cancel the current job.  
Load staples  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.  
Memory full, cannot print faxes  
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.  
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been  
restarted.  
Network/Network <x>  
The printer is connected to the network.  
Networkindicates that the printer is using the standard network port built into the printer system board. Network  
<x>indicates that an internal print server is installed inside the printer or that the printer is connected to an external  
print server.  
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.  
The printer is not detecting an analog phone line, so the fax is disabled. Connect the printer to an analog phone line.  
Understanding printer messages  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
No answer  
A fax number is dialed, but no connection is made. Wait for the message to clear.  
No dial tone  
The printer does not have a dial tone. Wait for the message to clear.  
Queued for sending  
The scanning process of a fax job completed, but the job is not sent yet because another fax job is being sent or  
received. Wait for the message to clear.  
Ready  
The printer is ready to receive print jobs.  
Reattach bin <x>  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Turn the printer off and then back on.  
If the error occurs a second time:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the specified bin.  
4 Reattach the bin.  
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
6 Restart the printer.  
If the error occurs again:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the specified bin.  
4 Contact Customer Support.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin.  
Reattach bin <x> – <y>  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Turn the printer off and then back on.  
If the error occurs a second time:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the specified bins.  
4 Reattach the bins.  
Understanding printer messages  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
6 Restart the printer.  
If the error occurs again:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the specified bins.  
4 Contact Customer Support.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bins.  
Reattach envelope feeder  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Turn the printer off and then back on.  
If the error occurs a second time:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the envelope feeder.  
4 Reattach the envelope feeder.  
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
6 Restart the printer.  
If the error occurs again:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the envelope feeder.  
4 Contact Customer Support.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the envelope feeder.  
Receive complete  
The printer has received an entire fax job. Wait for the message to clear.  
Receiving page <n>  
The printer receives page <n> of the fax job, where <n> is the number of the page received. Wait for the message  
to clear.  
Remove packaging material, check <x>  
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.  
Remove paper from <linked bin set name>  
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.  
Understanding printer messages  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.  
Remove paper from all bins  
Remove the paper from all of the bins. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.  
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.  
Remove paper from bin <x>  
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.  
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.  
Remove paper from standard output bin  
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.  
Replace <x> if restarting job.  
One or more messages which interrupted a scan job are now cleared. Replace the original documents in the scanner  
to restart the scan job. <x> is a page of the scan job.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the message appears. This cancels the job and clears the  
message.  
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the  
ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.  
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the scanner glass immediately  
after the last successfully scanned page.  
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully  
scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail,  
or FTP.  
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active. The message clears. A new scan job containing the same parameters  
as the previous job starts.  
Replace wiper  
Replace the fuser wiper, or try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Touch Ignore to clear the message, but at the next power-on, the message appears again.  
Restore Held Jobs?  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.  
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.  
Understanding printer messages  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Scan Document Too Long  
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel Job to clear the message.  
Scanner ADF Cover Open  
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.  
Scanner Jam Access Cover Open  
Close the bottom ADF door to clear the message.  
Securely clearing disk space  
The printer hard disk wiping process needs to recover. The message clears when all blocks are cleared.  
Sending page <n>  
The printer sends page <n> of the fax job, where <n> is the number of the page sent. Wait for the message to clear.  
Serial <x>  
The printer is using a serial cable connection. The serial port is the active communication link.  
Set clock  
The clock is not set. This message appears if no other fax status message appears. It remains until the clock is set.  
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.  
An error occurred on the SMTP server, or the SMTP server is not configured properly. Touch Continue to clear the  
message. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.  
Some held jobs were not restored  
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.  
Note: Some held jobs are not restored. They stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.  
System busy, preparing resources for job.  
Not all resources needed for the job are available. Wait for the message to clear.  
System busy, preparing resources for job. Deleting held job(s).  
Not all resources needed for the job are available. Some held jobs are deleted to free system memory. Wait for the  
message to clear.  
Unsupported disk  
An unsupported printer hard disk has been installed. Remove the unsupported device, and then install a supported  
one.  
Understanding printer messages  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Unsupported USB device, please remove  
Remove the unrecognized USB device.  
Unsupported USB hub, please remove  
Remove the unrecognized USB hub.  
USB/USB <x>  
The printer is using a USB cable connection. The USB port is the active communication link.  
Waiting for redial  
The printer is waiting to redial the fax number. Wait for the message to clear.  
30 Invalid refill, change cartridge  
Remove the print cartridge, and then install a supported one.  
31 Replace defective cartridge  
Remove the defective print cartridge, and then install a new one.  
32 Cartridge part number unsupported by device  
Remove the print cartridge, and then install a supported one.  
34 Short paper  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Load the appropriate paper or other specialty media in the proper tray.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray.  
• Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.  
• Check the Print Properties or Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size  
and type.  
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the  
paper is large enough for the data being printed.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.  
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit  
the menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Readyappears, enable Resource Save.  
• Install additional memory.  
Understanding printer messages  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
37 Insufficient memory to collate job  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted  
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored  
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
38 Memory full  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
• Install additional printer memory.  
42.xy Cartridge region mismatch  
Install a print cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y  
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:  
1
2
3
4
US  
Europe, the Middle East, and Africa  
Asia  
Latin America  
Understanding printer messages  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
9
Invalid region  
50 PPDS font error  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• The printer cannot find a requested font. From the PPDS menu, select Best Fit, and then select On. The printer  
will find a similar font and reformat the affected text.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
51 Defective flash detected  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Cancel the current print job.  
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.  
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.  
53 Unformatted flash detected  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.  
• Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.  
54 Network <x> software error  
<x> is the number of the network connection.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.  
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.  
54 Serial option <x> error  
<x> is the number of the serial option.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Check that the serial cable is connected correctly and is the proper one for the serial port.  
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer  
and host computer.  
Understanding printer messages  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.  
54 Standard network software error  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to continue printing.  
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.  
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.  
55 Unsupported option in slot <x>  
<x> is a slot on the printer system board.  
Try one or more of the following:  
1 Turn the printer power off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer power back on.  
56 Parallel port <x> disabled  
<x> is the number of the parallel port.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.  
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 Serial port <x> disabled  
<x> is the number of the serial port.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.  
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 Standard parallel port disabled  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.  
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
Understanding printer messages  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
56 Standard USB port disabled  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.  
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
56 USB port <x> disabled  
<x> is the number of the USB port.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message.  
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.  
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.  
57 Configuration change, held jobs were not restored  
Since the time the jobs were stored on the printer hard disk something has changed in the printer to invalidate the  
held jobs. Possible changes include:  
• The printer firmware has been updated.  
• Paper input, output, or duplex options needed for the print job were removed.  
• The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the port.  
• The printer hard disk contains jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.  
Touch Continue to clear the message.  
58 Too many bins attached  
1 Turn the printer power off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the additional bins.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer power back on.  
58 Too many disks installed  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the extra disks.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
Understanding printer messages  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
58 Too many flash options installed  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the excess flash memory.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
58 Too many trays attached  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Remove the additional trays.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
59 Incompatible envelope feeder  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Remove the envelope feeder.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the envelope feeder.  
59 Incompatible output bin <x>  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Remove the specified output bin.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified output bin.  
59 Incompatible tray <x>  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Remove the specified tray.  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.  
61 Remove defective disk  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.  
Understanding printer messages  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
62 Disk full  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.  
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.  
• Install a larger printer hard disk.  
63 Unformatted disk  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
• Format the printer hard disk.  
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.  
80 Routine maintenance needed  
The printer needs to have routine maintenance done. Order a maintenance kit, which contains all the items necessary  
to replace the pick rollers, the charge roll, the transfer roller, and the fuser.  
88 Cartridge low  
The toner is low. Replace the print cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
88.yy Cartridge nearly low  
The toner is low. Replace the print cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.  
88.yy Replace cartridge  
The print cartridge is empty.  
1 Replace the print cartridge.  
2 Touch Continue to clear the message.  
200–282.yy paper jam  
1 Clear the paper path.  
2 Touch Continue to continue printing.  
283 Staple jam  
1 Clear the jam from the specified stapler area(s).  
2 Touch Continue to continue printing.  
290-294.yy scanner jam  
Clear all original documents from the scanner.  
Understanding printer messages  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
293 Replace all originals if restarting job.  
The scanner was instructed to scan using the ADF but there is no paper in the ADF. Load paper in the ADF.  
Try one or more of the following:  
• Touch Continue if no scan job is active when the attendance message appears. This clears the message.  
• Touch Cancel Job if a scan job is processing when the attendance message appears. This cancels the job and  
clears the message.  
• Touch Scan from Automatic Document Feeder if the page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the  
ADF immediately after the last successfully scanned page.  
• Touch Scan from flatbed if page jam recovery is active. Scanning resumes from the flatbed immediately after  
the last successfully scanned page.  
• Touch Finish job without further scanning if page jam recovery is active. The job ends at the last successfully  
scanned page, but the job is not canceled. Successfully scanned pages go to their destination: copy, fax, e-mail,  
or FTP.  
• Touch Restart job if job recovery is active and you are able to restart the job. The message clears. A new scan job  
containing the same parameters as the previous job starts.  
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open  
Close the scanner cover.  
840.01 Scanner Disabled  
This message indicates that the scanner has been disabled by the system support person.  
841-846 Scanner Service Error  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Check all cable connections.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
If the service message appears again, then contact Customer Support, and report the message.  
900–999 Service <message>  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
3 Check all cable connections.  
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.  
5 Turn the printer back on.  
If the service message appears again, contact Customer Support, and report the message.  
Understanding printer messages  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option  
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware  
card.  
To fix this, download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Understanding printer messages  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintaining the printer  
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.  
Cleaning the exterior of the printer  
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.  
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,  
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.  
2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.  
3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of  
the printer.  
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.  
5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.  
Cleaning the scanner glass  
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.  
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
2 Open the scanner cover.  
Maintaining the printer  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3 Wipe the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.  
4 Wipe the white underside of the scanner cover until it is clean and dry.  
5 Open the bottom ADF door.  
1
2
6 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door.  
7 Close the bottom ADF door.  
8 Wipe the scanner glass (flatbed) and backing material by moving the cloth or paper towel from side to side.  
9 Close the scanner cover.  
Adjusting scanner registration  
Scanner Registration is a process to align the scan area with the paper location. To manually adjust the scanner  
registration:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Clean the scanner glass and backing material.  
6
MNO  
2
ABC  
3 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Scanner Manual Registrationappears.  
6 Touch Scanner Manual Registration.  
7 Touch Print Quick Test to print a registration page.  
8 Choose the section of the scanner to align.  
Maintaining the printer  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To align the scanner glass (flatbed):  
a Place the Quick Test page facedown on the scanner glass.  
b Touch Copy Quick Test.  
The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page.  
c Touch Flatbed.  
d Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Left Margin and Top Margin settings.  
e Touch Submit.  
f
Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original.  
Repeat the flatbed alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the  
original.  
To align the ADF:  
a Do one of the following:  
• To align the ADF front: place the Quick Test page faceup, short edge first into the ADF.  
• To align the ADF back: place the Quick Test page facedown, short edge first into the ADF.  
b Touch Copy Quick Test.  
The scanner prints a copy of the Quick Test page.  
c Touch ADF Front or ADF Back.  
d Use the copy of the Quick Test page to adjust the Horizontal Adjust and Top Margin settings.  
e Touch Submit.  
f
Touch Copy Quick Test and compare the new copy to the original.  
Repeat the ADF alignment steps until the position on the page of the Quick Test copy closely matches the  
original.  
9 Touch Back.  
10 Touch Exit Configuration.  
Maintaining the printer  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing supplies  
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until  
you are ready to use them.  
Do not expose supplies to:  
• Direct sunlight  
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)  
• High humidity above 80%  
• Salty air  
• Corrosive gases  
• Heavy dust  
Conserving supplies  
There are some settings you can change from the printer control panel that will help you conserve toner and paper.  
For more information, see “Supplies menu,” “Quality menu,” and “Finishing menu.”  
If you need to print several copies, you can conserve supplies by printing the first copy and checking it for accuracy  
before printing the remaining copies.  
Checking the status of supplies  
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.  
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch Status/Supplies.  
Note: If Status/Supplies is not on the home screen, then print a menu settings page to review the status of the  
supplies.  
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer  
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, print a network setup page and locate the IP address in  
the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Device Status. The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.  
Maintaining the printer  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Ordering supplies  
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies  
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web Site at www.lexmark.com or contact the  
place where you purchased the printer.  
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.  
Ordering print cartridges  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the print becomes faded, you may be able to extend the life of the  
print cartridge:  
1 Remove the print cartridge.  
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute toner.  
3 Reinsert the cartridge and continue printing.  
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.  
Recommended print cartridges and part numbers  
Part name  
Lexmark Return Program Cartridge Regular cartridge  
For the US and Canada  
Print cartridge  
X651A11A  
X651H11A  
X654X11A  
X651H04A  
X651A21A  
X651H21A  
X654X21A  
High Yield Print Cartridge  
Extra High Yield Print Cartridge  
High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label  
Applications  
Not applicable  
Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for  
Label Applications  
X654X04A  
Not applicable  
For Europe, the Middle East, and Africa  
Print cartridge  
X651A21E  
X651H21E  
X654X21E  
X651H04E  
X651A11E  
High Yield Print Cartridge  
X651H11E  
X654X11E  
Extra High Yield Print Cartridge  
High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label  
Applications  
Not applicable  
Maintaining the printer  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Part name  
Lexmark Return Program Cartridge Regular cartridge  
Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for  
Label Applications  
X654X04E  
Not applicable  
For the Asia Pacific Region, including Australia and New Zealand  
Print cartridge  
X651A21P  
X651H21P  
X654X21P  
X651H04P  
X651A11P  
High Yield Print Cartridge  
Extra High Yield Print Cartridge  
X651H11P  
X654X11P  
High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label  
Applications  
Not applicable  
Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for  
Label Applications  
X654X04P  
Not applicable  
For Latin America  
Print cartridge  
X651A21L  
X651H21L  
X654X21L  
X651H04L  
X651A11L  
High Yield Print Cartridge  
Extra High Yield Print Cartridge  
X651H11L  
X654X11L  
High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for Label  
Applications  
Not applicable  
Extra High Yield Return Program Print Cartridge for  
Label Applications  
X654X04L  
Not applicable  
Ordering a maintenance kit  
When 80 Routine maintenance neededappears, order a maintenance kit. The maintenance kit contains all  
the items necessary to replace the pick rollers, the charge roll, the transfer roller, and the fuser.  
Notes:  
• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit. The charge roll,  
fuser, pick rollers, and transfer roller can also be individually ordered and replaced as necessary.  
• To check the fuser type (T1 or T2) installed in the printer, remove the print cartridge to view the label on the  
fuser.  
Part name  
Part number  
Maintenance kit  
40X4723 (100 V T1 fuser)  
40X4724 (110 V T1 fuser)  
40X4765 (220 V T1 fuser)  
40X4766 (100 V T2 fuser)  
40X4767 (110 V T2 fuser)  
40X4768 (220 V T2 fuser)  
Maintaining the printer  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Ordering a fuser  
To check the fuser type (T1 or T2) installed in the printer, remove the print cartridge to view the label on the fuser.  
Part name  
Part number  
T1 fuser  
40X1870 (100 V)  
40X4418 (110 V)  
40X1871 (220 V)  
T2 fuser  
40X1872 (100 V)  
40X1873 (110 V)  
40X1874 (220 V)  
Ordering an ADF maintenance kit  
The ADF maintenance kit contains all the items necessary to replace the ADF pick mechanism and the ADF separator  
roller.  
See the following table for the maintenance kit part number for your specific printer.  
Part name  
Part number  
ADF Maintenance kit  
40X4769  
Ordering a transfer roller  
When toner smudges appear on the front or back of printed pages, order a replacement transfer roller.  
Part name  
Part number  
Transfer roll assembly  
40X1886  
Ordering charge rolls  
When toner fog or background shading appears on printed pages, order replacement charge rolls.  
Part name  
Part number  
Charge roll assembly  
40X5852  
Ordering pick rollers  
When the paper fails to properly feed from the tray, order new pick rollers.  
Part name  
Part number  
Pick rollers  
40X4308  
Maintaining the printer  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Ordering ADF replacement parts  
Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double-feeding or failing to feed through the  
automatic document feeder.  
Part name  
Part number  
3017345  
ADF pick assembly  
ADF separator roll  
3017348  
Ordering staple cartridges  
When Staples Lowor Staples Emptyappears, order the specified staple cartridge.  
For more information, see the illustrations inside the stapler door.  
Part name  
Part number  
Staple Cartridges–3 pack  
25A0013  
Recycling Lexmark products  
To return Lexmark products to Lexmark for recycling:  
1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.  
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country from the list.  
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.  
Moving the printer  
Before moving the printer  
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more  
trained personnel to move it safely.  
Maintaining the printer  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury  
or printer damage:  
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.  
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.  
• Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the  
same time.  
Notes:  
– Remove all printer options before moving the printer.  
– Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer  
warranty.  
Moving the printer to another location  
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:  
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart  
used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.  
• Keep the printer in an upright position.  
• Avoid severe jarring movements.  
Setting the printer up in a new location  
Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer:  
Maintaining the printer  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
Right Side 20 cm (8 in.)  
Left Side 31 cm (12 in.)  
1
2
3
4
5
Front  
Rear  
Top  
51 cm (20 in.)  
20 cm (8 in.)  
31 cm (12 in.)  
Shipping the printer  
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.  
Maintaining the printer  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Administrative support  
Finding advanced networking and administrator  
information  
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking  
Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark  
Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
If the printer is installed on a network, the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including:  
• Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel  
• Checking the status of the printer supplies  
• Configuring printer settings  
• Configuring network settings  
• Viewing reports  
To access the Embedded Web Server, type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Notes:  
• If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in  
the TCP/IP section.  
• For more information, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web  
Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Checking the device status  
Using the Embedded Web Server, you can view paper tray settings, the level of toner in the print cartridge, the  
percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit, and capacity measurements of certain printer parts. To view the  
device status:  
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Device Status.  
Setting up e-mail alerts  
You can have the printer send you an e-mail when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be  
changed, added, or unjammed.  
Administrative support  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
To set up e-mail alerts:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Under Other Settings, click E-mail Alert Setup.  
4 Select the items for notification, and type in the e-mail addresses.  
5 Click Submit.  
Note: See your system support person to set up the e-mail server.  
Viewing reports  
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the  
printer, the network, and supplies.  
To view reports from a network printer:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.  
Adjusting the brightness of the display  
If you are having trouble reading your display, the LCD brightness can be adjusted through the Settings menu.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Screen Brightnessappears.  
6 Touch the arrows to increase or decrease the brightness.  
Brightness settings can be adjusted from 20–100 (100 is the factory default setting).  
7 Touch Submit.  
8 Touch  
.
Administrative support  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adjusting Power Saver  
Available settings range from 1–240 minutes. The factory default is 30 minutes.  
To increase or decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Power Saver mode, do one of the following:  
Using the Embedded Web Server  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings, and then click General Settings.  
3 Click Timeouts.  
4 In the Power Saver box, increase or decrease the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters  
Power Saver mode.  
5 Click Submit.  
Using the printer control panel  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Timeoutsappears.  
6 Touch Timeouts.  
7 Touch the left or right arrow next to Power Saver Modeto decrease or increase the time the printer waits  
before entering Power Saver mode.  
The settings available range from 1–240 minutes.  
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
Restoring the factory default settings  
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before you  
restore the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 45.  
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default  
setting. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and Network/Port menu settings. All  
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
.
3 Touch Settings.  
Administrative support  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Factory Defaultsappears.  
6 Touch the left or right arrow until Restore Nowappears.  
7 Touch Submit.  
8 Touch  
.
Administrative support  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Solving basic printer problems  
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:  
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.  
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.  
• Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
• The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.  
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network  
device.  
• All options are properly installed.  
• The printer driver settings are correct.  
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the  
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.  
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only  
diamonds  
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
If Readydoes not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.  
Solving printing problems  
Multiple-language PDFs do not print  
The documents contain unavailable fonts.  
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.  
2 Click the printer icon.  
The Print dialog appears.  
3 Select Print as image.  
4 Click OK.  
Error message about reading USB drive appears  
Make sure the USB drive is supported. For information regarding tested and approved USB flash memory devices,  
visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
Troubleshooting  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Jobs do not print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT  
Make sure Readyor Power Saverappears on the display before sending a job to print.  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL  
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY  
Load paper in the tray.  
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED  
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.  
• If you are using a USB port, make sure you are running a supported operating system and using compatible  
printer software.  
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS INSTALLED PROPERLY AND WORKING  
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.  
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, check  
the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person  
to make sure the network is functioning correctly.  
Copies of the printer software are also available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE  
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.  
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED  
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.  
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.  
Confidential and other held jobs do not print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGES PRINT  
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.  
• Delete the print job, and then print it again.  
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.  
Troubleshooting  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY  
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.  
Job takes longer than expected to print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB  
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the  
job.  
CHANGE THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING TO OFF  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Recoveryappears.  
6 Touch Print Recovery.  
7 Touch the right arrow next to Page Protectuntil Offappears.  
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
Incorrect characters print  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS NOT IN HEX TRACE MODE  
If Ready Hexappears on the display, then you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job. Turn the  
printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.  
Troubleshooting  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Tray linking does not work  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER  
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.  
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.  
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS  
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.  
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.  
Note: The multipurpose feeder does not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper  
Size/Type menu.  
Large jobs do not collate  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON  
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.  
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.  
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB  
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity  
of images, and the number of pages in the job.  
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY  
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.  
Unexpected page breaks occur  
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Timeoutsappears.  
6 Touch Timeouts.  
7 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeoutuntil the desired value appears.  
Troubleshooting  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
Solving copy problems  
Copier does not respond  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
Scanner unit does not close  
Make sure there are no obstructions:  
1 Lift the scanner unit.  
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.  
3 Lower the scanner unit.  
Poor copy quality  
These are some examples of poor copy quality:  
• Blank pages  
• Checkerboard pattern  
• Distorted graphics or pictures  
• Missing characters  
• Faded print  
• Dark print  
• Skewed lines  
• Smudges  
• Streaks  
• Unexpected characters  
• White lines in print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
Troubleshooting  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the print becomes faded, replace the print cartridge.  
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY  
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning  
the scanner glass” on page 252.  
THE COPY IS TOO LIGHT OR TOO DARK  
Adjust the density of the copy.  
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT  
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
UNWANTED TONER IS IN THE BACKGROUND  
• Increase the background removal setting.  
• Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.  
PATTERNS (MOIRÉ) APPEAR IN THE OUTPUT  
• On the Copy screen, select the Text/Photo or Printed Image icon.  
• Rotate the original document on the scanner glass.  
• On the Copy screen, adjust the scale setting.  
TEXT IS LIGHT OR DISAPPEARING  
• On the Copy screen, touch the Text icon.  
• Decrease the background removal setting.  
• Increase the contrast setting.  
• Decrease the shadow detail setting.  
THE OUTPUT APPEARS WASHED OUT OR OVEREXPOSED  
• On the Copy screen, select the Printed Image icon.  
• Decrease the background removal setting.  
Troubleshooting  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Partial document or photo copies  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Solving scanner problems  
Checking an unresponsive scanner  
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:  
• The printer is turned on.  
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network  
device.  
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.  
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.  
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem  
with the scanner.  
Scan was not successful  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.  
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM  
Turn off and then restart the computer.  
Troubleshooting  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING  
Close all programs not being used.  
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH  
Select a lower scan resolution.  
Poor scanned image quality  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY  
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning  
the scanner glass” on page 252.  
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION  
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.  
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT  
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Partial document or photo scans  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT  
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.  
Troubleshooting  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Cannot scan from a computer  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.  
Solving fax problems  
Caller ID is not shown  
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.  
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings  
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends  
on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company  
to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.  
Cannot send or receive a fax  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES  
Clear any error messages.  
CHECK THE POWER  
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.  
Troubleshooting  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:  
• Telephone  
• Handset  
• Answering machine  
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK  
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.  
2 Listen for a dial tone.  
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.  
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.  
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.  
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST  
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone  
services can be used.  
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface  
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN  
provider.  
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,  
contact your DSL provider.  
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the  
PBX. If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.  
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE  
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working  
correctly.  
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending  
a fax.  
• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.  
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT  
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering  
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.  
CHECK FOR JAMS  
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Readyappears.  
Troubleshooting  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING  
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving afax. Call your telephone  
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.  
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION  
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice  
Mail and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.  
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL  
1 Dial the fax number.  
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.  
Can send but not receive faxes  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY  
Load paper in the tray.  
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS  
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone linerings before the printer answers. If you have extension  
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then  
keep the Ring Delay setting at 4.  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
5 In the Rings to Answer box, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering.  
6 Click Submit.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
88 Cartridge lowappears when the toner is low.  
Troubleshooting  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Can receive but not send faxes  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE  
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.  
THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY  
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper  
left corner.  
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine  
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.  
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY  
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.  
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.  
Received fax has poor print quality  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
RE-SEND THE DOCUMENT  
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:  
• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.  
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.  
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when you experience faded print, replace the cartridge.  
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH  
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:  
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.  
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address  
in the TCP/IP section.  
2 Click Settings.  
3 Click Fax Settings.  
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.  
Troubleshooting  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5 In the Max Speed box, click on one of the following:  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
33600  
6 Click Submit.  
Solving option problems  
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
RESET THE PRINTER  
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Unplug the printer.  
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.  
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY  
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not  
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option,  
or go to www.lexmark.com/publications to view the option instruction sheet.  
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED  
From the computer you are printing from, select the option. For more information, see “Updating available options  
in the printer driver” on page 47.  
Paper trays  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY  
1 Open the paper tray.  
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.  
3 Make sure paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.  
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.  
Troubleshooting  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
RESET THE PRINTER  
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY  
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may  
not be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation  
that came with the paper tray, or go to www.lexmark.com/publications to view the paper tray instruction sheet.  
2000-sheet tray  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE ELEVATOR TRAY IS NOT WORKING PROPERLY  
• Make sure the printer is properly connected to the 2000-sheet tray.  
• Make sure the printer is turned on.  
THE PAPER FEED ROLLERS DO NOT TURN TO ADVANCE PAPER  
• Make sure the printer is properly connected to the 2000-sheet tray.  
• Make sure the printer is turned on.  
Envelope feeder  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
RESET THE PRINTER  
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.  
MAKE SURE THE ENVELOPES ARE LOADED CORRECTLY  
1 Adjust the envelope support for the length of envelope you are using.  
2 For more information, see “Loading the envelope feeder” on page 81.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS  
Make sure the paper type and paper size settings match the envelopes you are using:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the settings for the envelope feeder from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct settings from the computer:  
• For Windows users, specify the settings from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the settings from the Print dialog.  
Troubleshooting  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
MAKE SURE THE ENVELOPE FEEDER IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY  
If the envelope feeder is listed on the menu settings page, but an envelope jams when it enters or exits the feeder,  
then it may not be properly installed. Reinstall the envelope feeder. For more information, see the hardware setup  
documentation that came with the envelope feeder, or go to www.lexmark.com/publications to view the  
envelope feeder instruction sheet.  
Output options  
If the high capacity output expander, 4-bin mailbox, or StapleSmart finisher is listed on the menu settings page, but  
paper jams when it exits the printer or enters the output option, then it may not be properly installed. Reinstall the  
option. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option.  
Flash memory card  
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
Hard disk with adapter  
Make sure the hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.  
Internal Solutions Port  
If the Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) does not operate correctly, then these are possible solutions. Try one or  
more of the following:  
CHECK THE ISP CONNECTIONS  
• Make sure the ISP is securely attached to the printer system board.  
• Make sure the cable is securely connected to the correct connector.  
CHECK THE CABLE  
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.  
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY  
For information about installing software for network printing, see the Networking Guide on the Software and  
Documentation CD  
Memory card  
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.  
Troubleshooting  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Solving paper feed problems  
Paper frequently jams  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty  
media guidelines.  
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY  
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the  
multipurpose feeder.  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared  
CHECK THE PAPER PATH  
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.  
Page that jammed does not reprint after you clear the jam  
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY  
In the Setup menu, Jam Recovery is set to Off. Set Jam Recovery to Auto or On:  
1 Make sure the printer is on and Readyappears.  
2 On the home screen, touch  
3 Touch Settings.  
.
4 Touch General Settings.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Recoveryappears.  
6 Touch Print Recovery.  
7 Touch the right arrow next to Jam Recoveryuntil Onor Autoappears.  
Troubleshooting  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8 Touch Submit.  
9 Touch  
.
Solving print quality problems  
The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions still do not  
correcttheproblem, contactCustomerSupport. Youmayhaveaprinterpartthatrequiresadjustmentorreplacement.  
Isolating print quality problems  
To help isolate print quality problems, print the print quality test pages:  
1 Turn the printer off.  
2 Load Letter- or A4-size paper in the tray.  
6
MNO  
2
ABC  
3 Hold down  
and  
while turning the printer on.  
4 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.  
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.  
5 Touch the down arrow until Print Quality Pagesappears.  
6 Touch Print Quality Pages.  
The print quality test pages print.  
7 Touch Back.  
8 Touch Exit Configuration.  
Blank pages  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
PACKING MATERIAL MAY BE ON THE PRINT CARTRIDGE  
Remove the print cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the print cartridge.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears, order a new print cartridge.  
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.  
Troubleshooting  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Characters have jagged or uneven edges  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PRINT QUALITY SETTINGS  
• Change the Print Resolution setting in the Quality menu to 600 dpi, 1200 Image Q, 1200 dpi, or 2400 Image Q.  
• Enable Enhance Fine Lines in the Quality menu.  
MAKE SURE DOWNLOADED FONTS ARE SUPPORTED  
If you are using downloaded fonts, then verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and  
the software program.  
Clipped images  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE GUIDES  
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Ghost images  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Troubleshooting  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
Gray background  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING  
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:  
• From the printer control panel, change the setting from the Quality menu.  
• For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.  
Incorrect margins  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
Troubleshooting  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING  
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.  
Paper curl  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Print irregularities  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
Troubleshooting  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.  
THE TONER MAY BE LOW  
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the print becomes faded, replace the print cartridge.  
THE FUSER MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE  
Replace the fuser.  
Repeating defects  
REPEATING MARKS OCCUR EVENLY DOWN THE PAGE  
Replace the charge rolls if the defects occur every 28.3 mm (1.11 in.).  
Replace the transfer roller if the defects occur every 51.7 mm (2.04 in.).  
Replace the print cartridge if the defects occur every:  
• 47.8 mm (1.88 in.)  
• 96.8 mm (3.81 in.)  
Replace the fuser if the defects occur every:  
• 88.0 mm (3.46 in.)  
• 95.2 mm (3.75 in.)  
Troubleshooting  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Skewed print  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES  
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.  
Solid black or white streaks  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT  
If the fill pattern is incorrect, then choose a different fill pattern from your software program or application.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE  
• Try a different type of paper.  
• Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.  
• Make sure the Paper Type and Paper Texture settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder.  
MAKE SURE THE TONER IS DISTRIBUTED EVENLY IN THE PRINT CARTRIDGE  
Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.  
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER  
Replace the used print cartridge with a new one.  
Troubleshooting  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Print is too light  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS  
The Toner Darkness setting is too light, the Brightness setting is too light, or the Contrast setting is too low.  
• From the printer control panel, change these settings from the Quality menu.  
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.  
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
THE TONER IS LOW  
When 88 Cartridge Lowappears, order a new print cartridge.  
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the print cartridge.  
Troubleshooting  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Print is too dark  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS  
The Toner Darkness setting is too dark, the Brightness setting is too dark, or the Contrast setting is too high.  
• From the printer control panel, change these settings from the Quality menu.  
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, change these settings from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.  
THE PAPER HAS ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY  
• Load paper from a fresh package.  
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.  
CHECK THE PAPER  
Avoid textured paper with rough finishes.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the print cartridge.  
Troubleshooting  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Solid color pages  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED  
Remove the print cartridge and shake it from side to side to redistribute the toner, and then reinstall it.  
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE OR LOW ON TONER  
Replace the used print cartridge with a new one. If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced.  
For more information, contact Customer Support.  
Streaked vertical lines  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE TONER IS SMEARED  
Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job:  
• From the printer control panel, select the Default Source from the Paper Menu.  
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.  
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE  
Replace the print cartridge.  
THE PAPER PATH MAY NOT BE CLEAR  
Check the paper path around the print cartridge.  
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot  
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.  
Troubleshooting  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clear any paper you see.  
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH  
Contact Customer Support.  
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the print cartridge.  
THE CHARGE ROLLS MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the charge rolls.  
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH  
Contact Customer Support.  
Toner rubs off  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING  
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the  
tray.  
Troubleshooting  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Toner specks  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE  
Replace the print cartridge.  
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH  
Contact Customer Support.  
Transparency print quality is poor  
Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES  
Use only transparencies recommended by the printer manufacturer.  
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING  
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:  
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Type setting from the Paper menu.  
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:  
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.  
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.  
Embedded Web Server does not open  
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:  
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTIONS  
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.  
Troubleshooting  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
CHECK THE NETWORK SETTINGS  
Depending on the network settings, you may need to type https://instead of http://before the printer IP  
address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, see your system administrator.  
Contacting Customer Support  
When you call Customer Support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the  
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.  
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top  
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.  
In the U.S. or Canada, call (1-800-539-6275). For other countries/regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at  
www.lexmark.com.  
Troubleshooting  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Notices  
Product name:  
Lexmark X651de, Lexmark X652de, Lexmark X654de, Lexmark X656de, Lexmark X656dte, Lexmark X658d, Lexmark  
X658de, Lexmark X658dme, Lexmark X658dfe, Lexmark X658dte, Lexmark X658dtme, Lexmark X658dtfe  
Machine type:  
7462  
Model(s):  
0A1, 0A5, 2A1, 2A2, 2A5, 2A6, 4A2, 4A6, 031, 035, 231, 232, 235, 236, 432, 436  
Edition notice  
July 2008  
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local  
law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,  
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in  
certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.  
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the  
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products  
or the programs described may be made at any time.  
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make  
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended  
to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,  
program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation  
and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly  
designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.  
For Lexmark technical support, visit support.lexmark.com.  
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.  
If you don't have access to the Internet, you can contact Lexmark by mail:  
Lexmark International, Inc.  
Bldg 004-2/CSC  
740 New Circle Road NW  
Lexington, KY 40550  
© 2008 Lexmark International, Inc.  
All rights reserved.  
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS  
This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer  
software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.  
Notices  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Trademarks  
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,  
registered in the United States and/or other countries.  
MarkTrack, PrintCryption, and StapleSmart are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.  
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of  
a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be  
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application  
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.  
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:  
Albertus  
The Monotype Corporation plc  
Monsieur Marcel OLIVE  
Antique Olive  
Apple-Chancery  
Arial  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
The Monotype Corporation plc  
CG Times  
Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a  
product of Agfa Corporation  
Chicago  
Clarendon  
Eurostile  
Geneva  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries  
Nebiolo  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
GillSans  
Helvetica  
Hoefler  
The Monotype Corporation plc  
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries  
Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry  
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation  
ITC Bookman  
ITC Mona Lisa  
ITC Zapf Chancery  
Joanna  
International Typeface Corporation  
International Typeface Corporation  
International Typeface Corporation  
The Monotype Corporation plc  
Arthur Baker  
Marigold  
Monaco  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
New York  
Apple Computer, Inc.  
Oxford  
Arthur Baker  
Palatino  
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries  
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries  
Agfa Corporation  
Stempel Garamond  
Taffy  
Times New Roman  
The Monotype Corporation plc  
Notices  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Univers  
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance  
information statement  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
theFCC Rules. Operation issubject tothe followingtwo conditions:(1)thisdevice maynotcauseharmfulinterference,  
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
Themanufactureris notresponsibleforanyradioortelevisioninterferencecausedbyusingotherthanrecommended  
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could  
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.  
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,  
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294  
for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC  
regulations.  
Exposure to radio frequency radiation  
The following notice is applicable if your printer has a wireless network card installed.  
The radiated output power of this device is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. A minimum separation  
of20cm(8inches)mustbemaintainedbetweentheantenna andanypersonsforthisdevicetosatisfytheRFexposure  
requirements of the FCC.  
Industry Canada notices  
Industry Canada compliance statement  
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard  
ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements  
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.  
Notices  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Industry Canada radio interference statement  
Industry Canada (Canada)  
ThisdevicecomplieswithIndustryCanadaspecificationRSS-210. Operationissubjecttothefollowingtwoconditions:  
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation of the device.  
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly  
prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.  
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from  
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to  
licensing.  
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit  
RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health  
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical  
specifications were met.  
Industry Canada (Canada)  
Cet appareil est conforme à lanormeRSS-210d'IndustryCanada. Sonfonctionnement estsoumisauxdeuxconditions  
suivantes :  
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles  
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.  
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne  
est strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.  
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement  
interdite.  
Pourempêcher toute interférenceradioau service faisant l'objetd'unelicence, cetappareildoitêtreutiliséàl'intérieur  
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.  
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.  
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre  
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au  
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.  
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme  
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.  
Radio interference notice  
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case, the  
user may be required to take adequate measures.  
Notices  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
European Community (EC) directives conformity  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,  
and1999/5/EContheapproximationandharmonizationofthelawsoftheMemberStatesrelatingtoelectromagnetic  
compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment  
and telecommunications terminal equipment.  
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.  
A declaration of conformity with the requirements of the directives is available from the Director of Manufacturing  
and Technical Support, Lexmark International, S. A., Boigny, France.  
This product satisfies the limits of EN 55022; safety requirements of EN 60950; radio spectrum requirements of ETSI  
EN 300 330-1 and ETSI EN 300 330-2; and the EMC requirements of EN 55024, ETSI EN 301 489-1 and ETSI EN 301  
489-3.  
Česky  
Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se  
základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.  
Dansk  
Deutsch  
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige  
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.  
Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit  
den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie  
1999/5/EG befindet.  
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ  
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ  
ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.  
English  
Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with  
the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Español  
Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los  
requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva  
1999/5/CE.  
Eesti  
Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi  
1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.  
Suomi  
Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten  
vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.  
Français  
Magyar  
Íslenska  
Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux  
exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.  
Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ  
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.  
Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og  
aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.  
Notices  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Italiano  
Latviski  
Lietuvių  
Malti  
Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti  
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.  
Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK  
būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.  
Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir  
kitas 1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.  
Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet  
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.  
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de  
essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.  
Norsk  
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende  
krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.  
Polski  
Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z  
zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy  
1999/5/EC.  
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais  
e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.  
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a  
všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.  
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi  
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.  
Svenska  
Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de  
väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.  
India emissions notice  
This device uses very low power low range RF communication that has been tested and found not to cause any  
interference whatsoever. The manufacturer is not responsible in case of any disputes arising out of requirement of  
permissions from any local authority, regulatory bodies or any organization, required by the end-user to install and  
operate this product at his premises.  
Noise emission levels  
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.  
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.  
Notices  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA  
Printing  
Scanning  
Copying  
Ready  
56 dBA  
52 dBA  
56 dBA  
30 dBA  
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.  
Temperature information  
Ambient temperature  
15.6C° – 32.2C°  
-40.0C° – 60.0C°  
Shipping and storage temperature  
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive  
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the  
European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products. If you have further questions about recycling options,  
visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.  
Product disposal  
Donotdisposeoftheprinterorsuppliesinthesamemannerasnormalhouseholdwaste.Consultyourlocalauthorities  
for disposal and recycling options.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance  
information statement  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council  
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information,  
a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone  
company.  
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.  
Notices  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with  
the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular  
plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant.  
See your setup documentation for more information.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a  
telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming  
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices  
that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products  
approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format  
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of  
0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.  
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that  
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will  
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect  
the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for  
you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.  
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network,  
the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.  
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark  
International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.  
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service  
commission, or corporation commission for information.  
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this  
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,  
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.  
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer  
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is  
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is  
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's  
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in  
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other  
electrical surges.  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other  
electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at  
the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and  
an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number  
of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a  
900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)  
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.  
Notices  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)  
is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus  
of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs  
of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product  
labeling.  
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer  
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is  
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is  
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s  
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in  
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other  
electrical surges.  
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.  
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada  
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence  
number : numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant  
être connectés à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est  
pas directement limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem  
est indiqué sur l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.  
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,  
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un  
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans  
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques  
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire  
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre  
région ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions  
électriques.  
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.  
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network  
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of  
terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for  
connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of  
warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of  
telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of  
Telecom's network services.  
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.  
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.  
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom  
customers.  
Notices  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment  
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for  
compliance to Telecom's specifications:  
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single  
manual call initiation, and  
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and  
the beginning of the next call attempt.  
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not  
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.  
South Africa telecommunications notice  
This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.  
Using this product in Switzerland  
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any  
line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present  
on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland.  
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse  
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou  
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé  
pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.  
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz  
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer  
14B5109 oder 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen  
werden. Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz  
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.  
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera  
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le  
linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono  
presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.  
Notices  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENERGY STAR  
Laser notice  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser  
products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is  
nominally a 5 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 770-795 nanometers. The laser system  
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal  
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.  
Laser advisory label  
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:  
Power consumption  
Product power consumption  
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.  
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.  
Mode  
Description  
Power consumption (Watts)  
Printing  
The product is generating hard-copy output from electronic 700 W  
inputs.  
Copying  
The product is generating hard-copy output from hard-copy 765 W  
original documents.  
Scanning  
Ready  
The product is scanning hard-copy documents.  
The product is waiting for a print job.  
165 W  
95 W  
Power Saver  
High Off  
The product is in energy-saving mode.  
21W, 24W, 26W  
The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch N/A  
is turned off.  
Notices  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Mode  
Description  
Power consumption (Watts)  
Low Off (<1 W Off) The product is plugged into a wall outlet, the power switch is N/A  
turned off, and the product is in the lowest possible power  
consumption mode.  
Off  
The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch 110V = 0.15W, 220V = 1.25W  
is turned off.  
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous  
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.  
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.  
Power Saver  
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Power Saver. The Power Saver Mode is equivalent to  
the EPA Sleep Mode. The Power Saver Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods  
of inactivity. The Power Saver Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of  
time, called the Power Saver Timeout.  
Factory default Power Saver Timeout for this product (in minutes):  
110V = 45 minutes, 220V = 60 minutes  
By using the configuration menus, the Power Saver Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes.  
Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time  
of the product. Setting the Power Saver Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.  
Off mode  
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power  
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.  
Total energy usage  
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided  
in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode  
in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.  
Statement of Limited Warranty  
Lexmark X651de, Lexmark X652de, Lexmark X654de, Lexmark X656de, Lexmark X656dte, Lexmark X658d, Lexmark  
X658de, Lexmark X658dme, Lexmark X658dfe, Lexmark X658dte, Lexmark X658dtme, Lexmark X658dtfe  
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY  
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-  
specific warranty information that came with your product.  
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from  
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”  
Notices  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Limited warranty  
Lexmark warrants that this product:  
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts  
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship  
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair  
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).  
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product  
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the  
product.  
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that  
user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to  
that user.  
Limited warranty service  
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months  
later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer  
shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.  
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver  
yourproducttotheRemarketerorLexmark,orshipitprepaidandsuitablypackagedtoaLexmarkdesignatedlocation.  
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated  
location.  
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the  
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.  
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.  
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair  
not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations,  
restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.  
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable  
storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).  
For further explanation of your warrantyalternatives and thenearestLexmarkauthorizedservicer in yourarea contact  
Lexmark on the World Wide Web at http://support.lexmark.com.  
Remote technicalsupport isprovidedforthisproduct throughoutitswarranty period. Forproductsnolongercovered  
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.  
Extent of limited warranty  
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints  
produced by any product.  
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:  
—Modification or unauthorized attachments  
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance  
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment  
Notices  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer  
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle  
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications  
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts  
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark  
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR  
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS  
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY  
WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE  
WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL  
INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT  
NOTICE.  
Limitation of liability  
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance  
or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual  
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.  
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the  
product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage  
to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such  
damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.  
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and  
its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are  
intended beneficiaries of this limitation.  
Additional rights  
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation  
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.  
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT  
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT: This License Agreement (“Software License Agreement”)  
is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Lexmark International, Inc. (“Lexmark”)  
that, to the extent your Lexmark product or Software Program is not otherwise subject to a written software license  
agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers, governs your use of any Software Program installed on or  
provided by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product. The term “Software Program” includes  
machine-readable instructions, audio/visual content (such as images and recordings), and associated media, printed  
materials and electronic documentation, whether incorporated into, distributed with or for use with your Lexmark  
product.  
Notices  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE  
LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED  
WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF  
THE AMOUNT YOU PAID. IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR USE BY OTHER PARTIES, YOU AGREE TO INFORM  
THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS.  
1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY. Lexmark warrants that the media (e.g., diskette or compact  
disk) on which the Software Program (if any) is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under  
normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period is ninety (90) days and commences on the date the  
Software Program is delivered to the original end-user. This limited warranty applies only to Software Program  
media purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor. Lexmark will replace the  
Software Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty.  
2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE  
AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS  
PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM "AS IS" AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,  
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES, ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE  
PROGRAM. TO THE EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRATIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH  
WARRANTIES TO THE 90-DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY.  
This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions, as that may be in force from time  
to time, that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or  
modified. If any such provisions apply, then to the extent Lexmark is able, Lexmark hereby limits its liability for  
breach of those provisions to one of the following: providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program  
or reimbursement of the price paid for the Software Program.  
TheSoftwareProgrammayincludeinternetlinkstoother software applicationsand/orinternetweb pageshosted  
and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark. You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not  
responsible in any way for the hosting, performance, operation, maintenance, or content of, such software  
applications and/or internet web pages.  
3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY AND ALL LIABILITY  
OF LEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE PRICE  
PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U.S. DOLLARS (OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY). YOUR  
SOLE REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO  
SEEK TO RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS, UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND  
DISCHARGED OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU.  
IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK, ITS SUPPLIERS, SUBSIDIARIES, OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,  
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES, LOST SAVINGS, INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF, INACCURACY IN, OR  
DAMAGE TO, DATA OR RECORDS, FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, OR DAMAGE TO REAL OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY,  
FORLOSSOFPRIVACYARISINGOUTORINANYWAYRELATEDTOTHEUSEOFORINABILITYTOUSETHESOFTWARE  
PROGRAM, OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENCE AGREEMENT),  
REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR  
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), AND EVEN IF LEXMARK, OR ITS SUPPLIERS,  
AFFILIATES, OR REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM  
BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD-PARTY CLAIM, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS DETERMINED  
LEGALLY INVALID. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE-STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR  
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
4 U.S.A. STATE LAWS. This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other  
rights that vary from state to state. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts  
or the exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to  
you.  
Notices  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 LICENSE GRANT. Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of  
this Software License Agreement:  
a Use. You may Use one (1) copy of the Software Program. The term “Use” means storing, loading, installing,  
executing, or displaying the Software Program. If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for  
concurrent use, you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement  
with Lexmark. You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one  
computer. You agree that you will not Use the Software Program, in whole or in part, in any manner that has  
the effect of overriding, modifying, eliminating, obscuring, altering or de-emphasizing the visual appearance  
ofanytrademark, tradename, tradedress or intellectualproperty noticethatappears on any computerdisplay  
screens normally generated by, or as a result of, the Software Program.  
b Copying. You may make one (1) copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup, archiving, or  
installation, provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program’s proprietary notices. You may  
not copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network.  
c
Reservation of Rights. The Software Program, including all fonts, is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark  
International, Inc. and/or its suppliers. Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this Software  
License Agreement.  
d Freeware. Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement, all or any portion  
of the Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties (“Freeware”)  
is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such  
Freeware, whether in the form of a discrete agreement, shrink-wrap license, or electronic license terms at the  
time of download or installation. Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and  
conditions of such license.  
6 TRANSFER. You may transfer the Software Program to another end-user. Any transfer must include all software  
components, media, printed materials, and this Software License Agreement and you may not retain copies of  
the Software Program or componentsthereof. The transfer may notbe an indirect transfer, such as a consignment.  
Prior to the transfer, the end-user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these Software  
License Agreement terms. Upon transfer of the Software Program, your license is automatically terminated. You  
may not rent, sublicense, or assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this Software License  
Agreement.  
7 UPGRADES. To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed to the original  
Software Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the  
original Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.  
8 LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not alter, decrypt, reverse engineer, reverse assemble,  
reverse compile or otherwise translate the Software Program or assist or otherwise facilitate others to do so,  
except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by applicable law for the purposes of inter-operability,  
error correction, and security testing. If you have such statutory rights, you will notify Lexmark in writing of any  
intended reverse engineering, reverse assembly, or reverse compilation. You may not decrypt the Software  
Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software Program.  
9 ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE. This Software License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original  
Software Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or  
supplement.  
10 TERM. This Software License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected. You may reject or terminate  
this license at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program, together with all modifications,  
documentation, and merged portions in any form, or as otherwise described herein. Lexmark may terminate your  
license upon notice if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this Software License Agreement. Upon such  
termination, you agree to destroy all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications,  
documentation, and merged portions in any form.  
Notices  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 TAXES. You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including, without limitation, any goods and  
services and personal property taxes, resulting from this Software License Agreement or your Use of the Software  
Program.  
12 LIMITATION ON ACTIONS. No action, regardless of form, arising out of this Software License Agreement may  
be brought by either party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen, except as provided under  
applicable law.  
13 APPLICABLE LAW. This Software License Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky,  
United States of America. No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply. The UN Convention on Contracts  
for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.  
14 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Program has been developed entirely at  
private expense. Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program are as set forth in this  
Software License Agreement and as restricted in DFARS 252.227-7014 and in similar FAR provisions (or any  
equivalent agency regulation or contract clause).  
15 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Lexmark, its affiliates, and agents may collect and use information  
you provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by  
you. Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent  
necessary to provide such services.  
16 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You may not (a) acquire, ship, transfer, or reexport, directly or indirectly, the Software  
Program or any direct product therefrom, in violation of any applicable export laws or (b) permit the Software  
Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws, including, without limitation, nuclear,  
chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.  
17 AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY. You and Lexmark agree to form this Software License  
Agreement electronically. This means that when you click the “Agree” or “I accept” button on this page or use  
this product, you acknowledge your agreement to these Software License Agreement terms and conditions and  
that you are doing so with the intent to “sign” a contract with Lexmark.  
18 CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT. You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place  
you sign thisSoftware LicenseAgreement and, ifapplicable, youaredulyauthorized by youremployeror principal  
to enter into this contract.  
19 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Software License Agreement (including any addendum or amendment to this  
Software License Agreement that is included with the Software Program) is the entire agreement between you  
and Lexmark relating to the Software Program. Except as otherwise provided for herein, these terms and  
conditions supersede all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals, and  
representations with respect to the Software Program or any other subject matter covered by this Software  
License Agreement (except to the extent such extraneous terms do not conflict with the terms of this Software  
License Agreement, any other written agreement signed by you and Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software  
Program). To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support services conflict with the terms of this  
Software License Agreement, the terms of this Software License Agreement shall control.  
MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES  
1 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions  
upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at  
http://go.microsoft.om/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.  
2 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology. You may find the terms and conditions upon which  
Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=83288.  
Notices  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
550-sheet tray (standard or  
optional)  
loading 72  
Answering 234  
AppleTalk menu 171  
attaching cables 44  
Numerics  
1565 Emulation error, load  
emulation option 251  
2000-sheet tray  
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 246  
56 Serial port <x> disabled 246  
56 Standard parallel port  
disabled 246  
56 Standard USB port disabled 247  
56 USB port <x> disabled 247  
57 Configuration change, held jobs  
were not restored 247  
58 Too many bins attached 247  
58 Too many disks installed 247  
58 Too many flash options  
installed 248  
58 Too many trays attached 248  
59 Incompatible envelope  
feeder 248  
59 Incompatible output bin  
<x> 248  
59 Incompatible tray <x> 248  
61 Remove defective disk 248  
62 Disk full 249  
63 Unformatted disk 249  
80 Routine maintenance  
needed 249  
841-846 Scanner Service Error 250  
88 Cartridge low 249  
88.yy Cartridge nearly low 249  
88.yy Replace cartridge 249  
900–999 Service <message> 250  
B
loading 75  
Bin Setup menu 163  
brightness, adjusting 263  
Busy 234  
200–282.yy paper jam 249  
250-sheet tray (standard or  
optional)  
loading 72  
283 Staple jam 249  
buttons, home screen 20  
buttons, printer control panel 19  
buttons, touch screen 22  
290-294.yy scanner jam 249  
293 Replace all originals if restarting  
job 250  
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 250  
30 Invalid refill, change  
cartridge 243  
31 Replace defective cartridge 243  
32 Cartridge part number  
unsupported by device 243  
34 Short paper 243  
35 Insufficient memory to support  
Resource Save feature 243  
37 Insufficient memory for Flash  
Memory Defragment  
operation 244  
37 Insufficient memory to collate  
job 244  
37 Insufficient memory, some Held  
Jobs were deleted 244  
37 Insufficient memory, some held  
jobs will not be restored 244  
38 Memory full 244  
C
cables  
Ethernet 44  
USB 44  
Call complete 234  
calling Customer Support 293  
canceling a job  
from Macintosh 136  
from the printer control  
panel 135  
from Windows 136  
card stock  
loading 79  
tips on using 131  
Change <src> to <x> 234  
charge rolls  
ordering 258  
Check tray <x> connection 234  
checking an unresponsive  
printer 266  
checking an unresponsive  
scanner 272  
checking device status  
on Embedded Web Server 262  
cleaning  
exterior of the printer 252  
scanner glass 252  
Close door or insert cartridge 235  
Close finisher side door 235  
collating copies 97  
Confidential print jobs 132  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 133  
Symbols  
39 Complex page, some data may  
not have printed 244  
“scan to computer” screen  
options 126, 127, 128  
42.xy Cartridge region  
mismatch 244  
50 PPDS font error 245  
51 Defective flash detected 245  
52 Not enough free space in flash  
memory for resources 245  
53 Unformatted flash  
A
Active NIC menu 165  
address book, fax  
using 113  
ADF  
detected 245  
copying using 92  
ADF maintenance kit  
ordering 258  
ADF pick assembly  
ordering 259  
ADF separator roll  
ordering 259  
54 Network <x> software error 245  
54 Serial option <x> error 245  
54 Standard network software  
error 246  
printing from Windows 133  
Confidential Print menu 181  
55 Unsupported option in slot 246  
Index  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
configuration information  
wireless network 48  
configurations  
printer 16  
Configure MP menu 155  
configuring  
placing separator sheets between  
copies 98  
quick copy 92  
reducing 96  
selecting a tray 95  
to letterhead 94  
envelopes  
loading 79, 81  
tips on using 130  
Ethernet networking  
Macintosh 53  
Windows 53  
port settings 56  
configuring the e-mail  
settings 106  
using the ADF 92  
using the scanner glass  
(flatbed) 93  
Ethernet port 44  
exterior of the printer  
cleaning 252  
Connect <x>bps 235  
connecting fax  
using RJ11 adapter 61  
connecting the printer to  
answering machine 66  
computer modem 68  
telephone 65  
Custom Bin Names menu 162  
Custom Names menu 161  
custom paper type  
assigning 84  
Custom Scan Sizes menu 161  
Custom Type <x>  
e-mail  
canceling 109  
notice of low supply level 262  
notice of paper jam 262  
notice of paper needed 262  
notice that different paper is  
needed 262  
changing name 84  
Custom Types menu 160  
telephone wall jack in  
Germany 64  
e-mail function  
setting up 105  
conserving supplies 255  
contacting Customer Support 293  
control panel, printer 19  
copy quality  
adjusting 97  
improving 104  
e-mail screen  
advanced options 110  
options 109, 110  
E-mail Settings menu 207  
e-mailing  
adding message line 108  
adding subject line 108  
changing output file type 108  
configuring the e-mail  
settings 106  
creating shortcuts using the  
Embedded Web Server 106  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 106  
setting up e-mail function 105  
using shortcut numbers 107  
using the address book 107  
using the touch screen 107  
D
date and time  
setting 70  
Default Source menu 151  
Dialing 235  
directory list, printing 135  
Disk corrupted 235  
Disk Full - Scan Job Canceled 235  
Disk Wiping menu 181  
display troubleshooting  
display is blank 266  
display shows only  
diamonds 266  
display, printer control panel 19  
adjusting brightness 263  
documents, printing  
from Macintosh 129  
from Windows 129  
duplexing 96  
copy screen  
options 101, 102  
Copy Settings menu 192  
copy troubleshooting  
copier does not respond 270  
partial document or photo  
copies 272  
poor copy quality 270  
poor scanned image quality 273  
scanner unit does not close 270  
copying  
adding a date and time  
stamp 100  
adding an overlay message 100  
adjusting quality 97  
canceling a copy job 101  
collating copies 97  
custom job (job build) 99  
document containing mixed  
paper sizes 95  
F
factory defaults, restoring  
printer control panel menus 264  
fax card  
E
Embedded Web Server 262  
administrator settings 262  
checking device status 262  
does not open 292  
installing 42  
Fax failed 235  
Fax memory full 235  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)  
menu 198  
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)  
menu 205  
Fax partition inoperative. Contact  
system administrator. 236  
fax quality, improving 118  
networking settings 262  
setting up e-mail alerts 262  
Embedded Web Server  
Administrator's Guide 262  
emission  
notices 296, 297, 298, 299  
enlarging a copy 96  
Envelope Enhance 155  
enlarging 96  
from one size to another 94  
improving copy quality 104  
making transparencies 93  
multiple pages on one sheet 98  
on both sides of the paper  
(duplexing) 96  
photos 93  
Index  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
fax screen  
advanced options 117  
options 116, 117  
flash drive 134  
installing printer software  
adding options 47  
Internal Solutions Port  
installing 32  
troubleshooting 280  
Internal Solutions Port, network  
changing port settings 56  
Invalid PIN 237  
Flash Drive menu 215  
flash memory card  
installing 30  
troubleshooting 280  
Flushing buffer 236  
forwarding faxes 119  
FTP  
address book 121  
FTP quality, improving 124  
FTP screen  
advanced options 123  
options 122, 123  
FTP Settings menu 212  
fuser  
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.  
Contact system administrator. 236  
Fax Station Name not set up 236  
Fax Station Number not set up 236  
fax troubleshooting  
blocking junk faxes 115  
caller ID is not shown 274  
can receive but not send  
faxes 277  
can send but not receive  
faxes 276  
cannot send or receive a fax 274  
received fax has poor print  
quality 277  
IPv6 menu 170  
J
jams  
avoiding 138  
locating doors and trays 139  
locations 139  
numbers 139  
jams, clearing  
200 139  
201 139  
202 141  
230–239 142  
240–249 143  
250 144  
ordering 258  
faxing  
G
canceling a fax job 116  
changing resolution 114  
choosing a fax connection 60  
creating shortcuts using the  
Embedded Web Server 112  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 113  
forwarding faxes 119  
holding faxes 118  
improving fax quality 118  
making a fax lighter or  
darker 114  
sending a fax at a scheduled  
time 115  
sending using the computer 112  
sending using the printer control  
panel 111  
setting the date and time 70  
setting the outgoing fax name and  
number 69  
turning Daylight Saving Time  
on 70  
using shortcuts 113  
using the address book 113  
viewing a fax log 115  
FCC notices 296, 300  
fiber optic  
network setup 53  
finding information  
customer support 15  
publications 15  
Finishing menu 223  
firmware card  
guidelines  
card stock 131  
envelopes 130  
labels 131  
letterhead 129  
transparencies 130  
260 145  
270–279 145  
280–289 paper jams 145  
283 staple jams 146  
290–294 148  
stapler 146  
job interrupt 100  
Job stored for delayed  
transmission 237  
H
hard disk with adapter  
troubleshooting 280  
held jobs 132  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 133  
printing from Windows 133  
Help menu 233  
holding faxes 118  
home screen  
L
labels  
buttons 20  
HTML menu 231  
tips on using 131  
letterhead  
copying to 94  
loading, 2000-sheet tray 75  
loading, multipurpose feeder 79  
loading, trays 72  
tips on using 129  
LexLink menu 172  
light, indicator 19  
Line busy 237  
I
Image menu 232  
Insert staple cartridge 236  
Insert Tray <x> 236  
Install bin <x> 237  
Install envelope feeder 237  
Install tray <x> 237  
installation  
linking trays 83  
Load <src> with <x> 238  
Load manual feeder with <x> 238  
Load staples 238  
loading  
wireless network 49, 50  
installing  
options in driver 47  
printer software 46  
2000-sheet tray 75  
installing 30  
Index  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250-sheet tray (standard or  
optional) 72  
550-sheet tray (standard or  
optional) 72  
card stock 79  
envelopes 79, 81  
letterhead in 2000-sheet tray 75  
letterhead in multipurpose  
feeder 79  
letterhead in trays 72  
multipurpose feeder 79  
transparencies 79  
NetWare 172  
O
Network <x> 165  
Network Card 168  
Network Reports 168  
Paper Loading 159  
Paper Size/Type 151  
Paper Texture 156  
Paper Weight 157  
Parallel <x> menu 175  
PCL Emul 228  
PDF 227  
PostScript 228  
Quality 225  
Reports 164  
options  
fax card 26, 42  
firmware card 30  
firmware cards 26  
flash memory card 30  
internal 26  
Internal Solutions Port 32  
memory card 29  
memory cards 26  
networking 26  
ports 26  
printer hard disk 38  
options, touch-screen  
copy 101, 102  
e-mail 109, 110  
fax 116, 117  
FTP 122, 123  
scan to computer 126, 127, 128  
ordering  
ADF maintenance kit 258  
ADF pick assembly 259  
ADF separator roll 259  
charge rolls 258  
fuser 258  
maintenance kit 257  
pick rollers 258  
staple cartridges 259  
transfer roller 258  
ordering supplies 256  
output file type  
changing 108  
M
Security Audit Log 183  
Serial <x> 177  
Set Date/Time 183  
Settings 184  
Macintosh  
wireless network installation 50  
maintenance kit  
ordering 257  
memory card  
installing 29  
troubleshooting 280  
Memory full, cannot print  
faxes 238  
menu settings page  
printing 45  
menus  
Active NIC 165  
Setup 221  
SMTP Setup menu 167  
Standard Network 165  
Standard USB 173  
Substitute Size 155  
TCP/IP 169  
Universal Setup 162  
Utilities 226  
Wireless 171  
XPS 232  
Miscellaneous menu 180  
moving the printer 259, 260  
multiple pages on one sheet 98  
multipurpose feeder  
loading 79  
AppleTalk 171  
Bin Setup 163  
Confidential Print 181  
Configure MP 155  
Copy Settings 192  
Custom Bin Names 162  
Custom Names 161  
Custom Scan Sizes 161  
Custom Types 160  
Default Source 151  
diagram of 150  
Disk Wiping 181  
Envelope Enhance 155  
E-mail Settings 207  
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 198  
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 205  
Finishing 223  
P
N
paper  
NetWare menu 172  
characteristics 85  
letterhead 86  
preprinted forms 86  
recycled 87  
selecting 86  
selecting weight 157  
setting size 71  
Network 238  
Network <x> 238  
Network <x> menu 165  
Network Card menu 168  
Network Reports menu 168  
network setup page 46  
Networking Guide 262  
No analog phone line connected to  
modem, fax is disabled. 238  
No answer 239  
setting type 71  
storing 87  
Flash Drive 215  
FTP Settings 212  
Help 233  
HTML 231  
Image 232  
unacceptable 86  
Universal Paper Size 162  
Universal size setting 71  
paper feed troubleshooting  
message remains after jam is  
cleared 281  
No dial tone 239  
noise emission levels 299  
notices 295, 296, 297, 298, 299,  
300, 302, 303, 304, 305  
IPv6 170  
LexLink 172  
Miscellaneous 180  
Index  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
paper jams  
avoiding 138  
solid white streaks 287  
streaked vertical lines 290  
toner fog or background  
shading 291  
toner rubs off 291  
toner specks 292  
print troubleshooting  
error reading USB drive 266  
held jobs do not print 267  
incorrect characters print 268  
incorrect margins 284  
jammed page does not  
reprint 281  
job prints from wrong tray 268  
job prints on wrong paper 268  
job takes longer than  
expected 268  
32 Cartridge part number  
unsupported by device 243  
34 Short paper 243  
35 Insufficient memory to support  
Resource Save feature 243  
37 Insufficient memory for Flash  
Memory Defragment  
operation 244  
37 Insufficient memory to collate  
job 244  
37 Insufficient memory, some Held  
Jobs were deleted 244  
37 Insufficient memory, some held  
jobs will not be restored 244  
38 Memory full 244  
39 Complex page, some data may  
not have printed 244  
42.xy Cartridge region  
mismatch 244  
50 PPDS font error 245  
51 Defective flash detected 245  
52 Not enough free space in flash  
memory for resources 245  
53 Unformatted flash  
Paper Loading menu 159  
Paper Size/Type menu 151  
paper sizes  
supported by the printer 88  
Paper Texture menu 156  
paper type  
custom 84  
paper types  
duplex support 90  
supported by finisher 90  
supported by printer 90  
where to load 90  
Paper Weight menu 157  
paper weights  
supported by finisher 90  
Parallel <x> menu 175  
PCL Emul menu 228  
PDF menu 227  
photos  
copying 93  
pick rollers  
ordering 258  
jobs do not print 267  
Large jobs do not collate 269  
multiple-language PDFs do not  
print 266  
paper curl 285  
paper frequently jams 281  
tray linking does not work 269  
unexpected page breaks  
occur 269  
printer  
configurations 16  
port settings  
configuring 56  
PostScript menu 228  
Power Saver  
adjusting 264  
detected 245  
54 Network <x> software  
error 245  
54 Serial option <x> error 245  
54 Standard network software  
error 246  
minimum clearances 17, 260  
models 16  
print job  
canceling from Macintosh 136  
canceling from Windows 136  
print quality  
cleaning the scanner glass 252  
print quality test pages,  
printing 135  
moving 259, 260  
55 Unsupported option in  
slot 246  
56 Parallel port <x> disabled 246  
56 Serial port <x> disabled 246  
56 Standard parallel port  
disabled 246  
selecting a location 17  
setting up in new location 260  
shipping 261  
printer control panel 19  
factory defaults, restoring 264  
printer hard disk  
print quality troubleshooting  
blank pages 282  
56 Standard USB port  
disabled 247  
installing 38  
characters have jagged  
edges 283  
printer messages  
56 USB port <x> disabled 247  
57 Configuration change, held  
jobs were not restored 247  
58 Too many bins attached 247  
58 Too many disks installed 247  
58 Too many flash options  
installed 248  
58 Too many trays attached 248  
59 Incompatible envelope  
feeder 248  
59 Incompatible output bin  
<x> 248  
59 Incompatible tray <x> 248  
61 Remove defective disk 248  
1565 Emulation error, load  
emulation option 251  
200–282.yy paper jam 249  
283 Staple jam 249  
290-294.yy scanner jam 249  
293 Replace all originals if  
restarting job 250  
293.02 Flatbed Cover Open 250  
30 Invalid refill, change  
cartridge 243  
31 Replace defective  
cartridge 243  
clipped images 283  
ghost images 283  
gray background 284  
poor transparency quality 292  
print irregularities 285  
print is too dark 289  
print is too light 288  
print quality test pages 282  
repeating defects 286  
skewed print 287  
solid black streaks 287  
solid color pages 290  
Index  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62 Disk full 249  
No dial tone 239  
Queued for sending 239  
Ready 239  
Reattach bin <x> 239  
Reattach bin <x> – <y> 239  
Reattach envelope feeder 240  
Receive complete 240  
Receiving page <n> 240  
Remove packaging material,  
check <x> 240  
Remove paper from <linked bin  
set name> 240  
Remove paper from all bins 241  
Remove paper from bin <x> 241  
Remove paper from standard  
output bin 241  
Replace all originals if restarting  
job. 241  
Replace wiper 241  
Restore Held Jobs? 241  
Scan Document Too Long 242  
Scanner ADF Cover Open 242  
Scanner Disabled 250  
Scanner Jam Access Cover  
Open 242  
Securely clearing disk space 242  
Sending page <n> 242  
Serial <x> 242  
Internal Solutions Port 280  
memory card 280  
option not working 278  
paper trays 278  
StapleSmart finisher 280  
printer problems, solving  
basic 266  
63 Unformatted disk 249  
80 Routine maintenance  
needed 249  
841-846 Scanner Service  
Error 250  
88 Cartridge low 249  
88.yy Cartridge nearly low 249  
88.yy Replace cartridge 249  
900–999 Service <message> 250  
Answering 234  
printing  
directory list 135  
from flash drive 134  
from Macintosh 129  
from Windows 129  
installing printer software 46  
menu settings page 45  
network setup page 46  
print quality test pages 135  
printing confidential and other held  
jobs  
Busy 234  
Call complete 234  
Change <src> to <x> 234  
Check tray <x> connection 234  
Close door or insert cartridge 235  
Close finisher side door 235  
Connect <x>bps 235  
Dialing 235  
Disk corrupted 235  
Disk Full - Scan Job Canceled 235  
Fax failed 235  
Fax memory full 235  
Fax partition inoperative. Contact  
system administrator. 236  
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.  
Contact system  
from Macintosh computer 133  
from Windows 133  
Q
Quality menu 225  
Queued for sending 239  
R
Ready 239  
administrator. 236  
Reattach bin <x> 239  
Reattach bin <x> – <y> 239  
Reattach envelope feeder 240  
Receive complete 240  
Receiving page <n> 240  
recycled paper  
Fax Station Name not set up 236  
Fax Station Number not set  
up 236  
Flushing buffer 236  
Insert staple cartridge 236  
Insert Tray <x> 236  
Install bin <x> 237  
Install envelope feeder 237  
Install tray <x> 237  
Set clock 242  
SMTP server not set up. Contact  
system administrator. 242  
Some held jobs were not  
restored 242  
System busy, preparing resources  
for job. 242  
System busy, preparing resources  
for job. Deleting held job(s). 242  
Unsupported disk 242  
Unsupported USB device, please  
remove 243  
Unsupported USB hub, please  
remove 243  
using 87  
recycling  
Lexmark products 259  
WEEE statement 300  
reducing a copy 96  
Remove packaging material, check  
<x> 240  
Remove paper from <linked bin set  
name> 240  
Remove paper from all bins 241  
Remove paper from bin <x> 241  
Remove paper from standard  
output bin 241  
Repeat print jobs 132  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 133  
Invalid PIN 237  
Job stored for delayed  
transmission 237  
Line busy 237  
Load <src>with <x> 238  
Load manual feeder with  
<x> 238  
Load staples 238  
Memory full, cannot print  
faxes 238  
Network 238  
Network <x> 238  
No analog phone line connected  
to modem, fax is disabled. 238  
No answer 239  
USB/USB <x> 243  
Waiting for redial 243  
printer options troubleshooting  
2000-sheet tray 279  
4-bin mailbox 280  
envelope feeder 279  
flash memory card 280  
hard disk with adapter 280  
high capacity output  
printing from Windows 133  
expander 280  
Index  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replace all originals if restarting  
job. 241  
Replace wiper 241  
reports  
using the address book 121  
using the keypad 120  
Securely clearing disk space 242  
Security Audit Log menu 183  
Sending page <n> 242  
Serial <x> 242  
Serial <x> menu 177  
serial port 58  
serial printing  
storing 255  
supplies, ordering 256  
ADF maintenance kit 258  
ADF pick assembly 259  
ADF separator roll 259  
charge rolls 258  
fuser 258  
maintenance kit 257  
pick rollers 258  
viewing 263  
Reports menu 164  
Reserve print jobs 132  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 133  
printing from Windows 133  
resolution, fax  
changing 114  
Restore Held Jobs? 241  
RJ11 adapter, using 61  
setting up 58  
Set clock 242  
Set Date/Time menu 183  
setting  
paper size 71  
staple cartridges 259  
transfer roller 258  
system board  
accessing 27  
System busy, preparing resources  
for job. 242  
paper type 71  
TCP/IP address 169  
Universal Paper Size 71  
setting up  
System busy, preparing resources  
for job. Deleting held job(s). 242  
S
safety information 13, 14  
Scan Document Too Long 242  
scan quality, improving 128  
scan troubleshooting  
cannot scan from a  
serial printing 58  
T
setting up the printer  
on a wired network  
(Macintosh) 53  
on a wired network  
(Windows) 53  
Settings menu 184  
Setup menu 221  
shipping the printer 261  
shortcuts, creating  
e-mail 106  
TCP/IP menu 169  
telecommunication  
notices 300, 302, 303  
touch screen  
computer 274  
partial document or photo  
scans 273  
scan was not successful 272  
scanner unit does not close 270  
scanning takes too long or freezes  
the computer 273  
buttons 22  
transfer roller  
ordering 258  
transparencies  
loading 79  
making 93  
scanner  
fax destination 112, 113  
FTP destination 121, 122  
SMTP server not set up. Contact  
system administrator. 242  
SMTP Setup menu 167  
Some held jobs were not  
restored 242  
Standard Network menu 165  
standard tray  
loading 72  
Standard USB menu 173  
staple cartridges  
ordering 259  
status of supplies, checking 255  
storing  
paper 87  
Automatic Document Feeder  
(ADF) 18  
functions 17  
registration 253  
scanner glass 18  
Scanner ADF Cover Open 242  
Scanner Disabled 250  
scanner glass  
cleaning 252  
scanner glass (flatbed)  
copying using 93  
tips on using 130  
tray linking 84  
tray unlinking 84  
trays  
linking 83, 84  
unlinking 83, 84  
troubleshooting  
checking an unresponsive  
printer 266  
checking an unresponsive  
scanner 272  
contacting Customer  
Support 293  
solving basic printer  
problems 266  
troubleshooting, copy  
copier does not respond 270  
partial document or photo  
copies 272  
poor copy quality 270  
poor scanned image quality 273  
scanner unit does not close 270  
Scanner Jam Access Cover  
Open 242  
scanning to a computer 125  
improving scan quality 128  
scanning to a flash drive 126  
scanning to an FTP address  
creating shortcuts using the  
computer 121  
creating shortcuts using the touch  
screen 122  
improving FTP quality 124  
using shortcut numbers 121  
supplies 255  
subject and message information  
adding to e-mail 108  
Substitute Size menu 155  
supplies  
conserving 255  
status of 255  
Index  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
troubleshooting, display  
display is blank 266  
display shows only  
solid color pages 290  
solid white streaks 287  
streaked vertical lines 290  
toner fog or background  
shading 291  
toner rubs off 291  
toner specks 292  
troubleshooting, printer options  
2000-sheet tray 279  
4-bin mailbox 280  
envelope feeder 279  
flash memory card 280  
hard disk with adapter 280  
high capacity output  
expander 280  
viewing  
reports 263  
diamonds 266  
W
troubleshooting, fax  
blocking junk faxes 115  
caller ID is not shown 274  
can receive but not send  
faxes 277  
can send but not receive  
faxes 276  
cannot send or receive a fax 274  
received fax has poor print  
quality 277  
troubleshooting, paper feed  
message remains after jam is  
cleared 281  
Waiting for redial 243  
Windows  
wireless network installation 49  
wired network setup  
using Windows 53  
wired networking  
using Macintosh 53  
Wireless menu 171  
wireless network  
configuration information 48  
installation, using Macintosh 50  
installation, using Windows 49  
Internal Solutions Port 280  
memory card 280  
troubleshooting, print  
error reading USB drive 266  
held jobs do not print 267  
incorrect characters print 268  
incorrect margins 284  
jammed page does not  
reprint 281  
job prints from wrong tray 268  
job prints on wrong paper 268  
job takes longer than  
expected 268  
option not working 278  
paper trays 278  
StapleSmart finisher 280  
troubleshooting, scan  
cannot scan from a  
computer 274  
partial document or photo  
scans 273  
scan was not successful 272  
scanner unit does not close 270  
scanning takes too long or freezes  
the computer 273  
X
XPS menu 232  
jobs do not print 267  
Large jobs do not collate 269  
multiple-language PDFs do not  
print 266  
U
Universal Paper Size  
setting 71  
paper curl 285  
paper frequently jams 281  
tray linking does not work 269  
unexpected page breaks  
occur 269  
troubleshooting, print quality  
blank pages 282  
characters have jagged  
edges 283  
clipped images 283  
Universal Setup menu 162  
unlinking trays 83  
Unsupported disk 242  
Unsupported USB device, please  
remove 243  
Unsupported USB hub, please  
remove 243  
USB port 44  
USB/USB <x> 243  
using RJ11 adapter 61  
Utilities menu 226  
ghost images 283  
gray background 284  
poor transparency quality 292  
print irregularities 285  
print is too dark 289  
print is too light 288  
print quality test pages 282  
repeating defects 286  
skewed print 287  
V
Verify print jobs 132  
printing from Macintosh  
computer 133  
printing from Windows 133  
solid black streaks 287  
Index  
318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

La Crosse Technology Weather Radio 30B 1425B User Manual
Lantronix Planer UBOX4100 User Manual
La Pavoni Food Processor LP25 User Manual
Legacy Car Audio Car Stereo System LCD15DX User Manual
Lenmar Enterprises Battery Charger PRO68Q User Manual
Lennox International Inc Indoor Fireplace MPB35ST NM User Manual
Lenovo Computer Hardware 3656 User Manual
Liebert Surge Protector Little Glass House User Manual
Makita Cordless Saw 5093D User Manual
M Audio Headphones gd_060903 User Manual